Home

2013 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. 0 000 556 a INDEX 715 Retrigeratit iita ex eno s eom Pie aia 637 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 0000 0 0000 eee 69 Remote Control Starting System s sss ea aue eee cee ae o 30 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 428 Remote Starting System co escoa rers eee recrea 30 Replacement Bulbs 0000004 671 Replacement Keys llis 20 Replacement Parts llle 629 Replacement Tires l l es 541 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 697 Restraints Child ispum r Sao a Rma 87 Restraints Occupant llle eee 52 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 0 0 301 Roll Over Warning llle 5 Rotation Tires ucro ecce ORE TR a 544 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 116 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 118 Safety Defects Reporting 200 697 Safety Exhaust G 8 ss 4er d Rb ne es 52 Safety Information Tire aroc aea n se 520 Safety Tips s aec E tee Sen Bese Heated 114 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 0005 381 Schedule Maintenance 0 000008 684 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 663 Seat Belt Reminder llle 69 Seat Belts ssec e Roe CO E YE 56 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 61 And Pregnant Women 00000005 Child Restraint iiu sdb oot Gecko Extender 5 seca dea ec de s Front Seat 6 044504 s0a
2. 0 461 Bulb Replacement 2 6 0 0 00 ce eee eee 671 Bulbs Light ss sarah eatin ate eee sae ak ola dcs 118 Calibration Compass 0 6 e ee eee 349 Camera Rear 0 ee 265 Capacities Fluid 2 6 llle 678 Caps Filler Fiel caig gaa eene S wens Ae Gene hE et Be 564 OU ENGING 12593 Lee eee deg s 633 Power Steering ues Sane eh ace x RR ed 504 Radiator Coolant Pressure 704 INDEX aes Carbon Monoxide Warning 115 Cargo Area Covers i acceda Rer OP Rh t a 301 Cargo Area Features 44 e ner a 298 Cargo Compartment s osie ma baa a a a ss 298 Light 2 ccrgi arate and ete Be aeania 299 Cargo Light ios ac ecu eed a ssc 299 Cargo lie DOWnS 0 52026 mesiaca eue ema e 302 Car Washes c isses er e res 658 Cellular Phone see m Rh d 431 Center High Mounted Stop Light 677 Certification Eabel sss eee bt e 567 Chains li 422 3 cad emra Bx Re ERE G 542 Chart Tite Sizing cie em Re 522 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 628 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 114 Checks batetysc s scd e tequbeed ege em dope 114 Child Restraint etm RR 87 Child Safety Locks 52 9 cto bey oy 36 Clean Air Gasoline sek Re le PS Bee as 556 Cleaning Wheels sse cpEas 4 Re ERR EROR e iii 660 Climate Control 4 ecu cig Sia Re RR end 431 Clock eum edes Ch Se aa PR Es 360 Cold Weather Operation lille 457 Compact Disc CD Maintenance
3. CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 625 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 626 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 627 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 627 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 12e apre the d ea 628 E REPLACEMENT PARIS ace oc 629 B DEALER SERVICE x3 bee 9 V3 Rr 629 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 630 Engine OI su iere tod Hom 631 Engine Oil Filter 1 ns 634 Engine Air Cleaner Filter gt o oo osoo cioa 634 Maintenance Free Battery 635 Air Conditioner Maintenance 636 Body Lubrication eresia sewisie erya Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid sse Exhaust System 00 0000 eee O Cooling System 00000 644 Brake System ic scabs cee o e ee ead 650 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Rear Axle Fluid 0 652 Transfer Case i sn RE Ee ep end 653 Automatic Transmission 654 Appearance Care And Protection From CCORTOSIOTI sse tor sort bad vex bn ee a 658 Ba FUSES i lv4 9 RR EE REESE 664 Totally Integrated Power Module 664 B VEHICLE STORAGE 00 671 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 671 E BULB REPLACEMENT 672 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped mr deep s
4. 430 Compact Spare Tire l l 537 COMPASS x eua con aee De Ga ea RC HE RO 347 Compass Calibration l l 349 Compass Variance ga i one h ai 348 Computer Trip Travel 0 020000 344 Connector UCL afete aiii rike ee ecu bep d eg 385 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 385 Conserving Fuel iiss uoa cos eem a gems 341 Console Overhead lesen 268 Contract Service ues died ow d uc ig 695 en INDEX 705 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 647 Cooling System s ess ex eet em eit 644 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 646 Coolant Capacity sies S rabami ea ans oe od 678 Coolant Level iius ide ete beh hee eed 648 Disposal of Used Coolant 648 Drain Flush and Refill 645 Inspecuon 2i aed oa pe grt Ee denies ob s 645 Points to Remember 000 649 Pressure Cap vs eu odore ee S pO ont hae ds 647 Radiator Cap 1 6 eee eee 647 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 646 Corrosion Protection 2 6 6 eee eee eee 658 Cruise Control Speed Control 227 Ciipholders n 1e ns ede Reve Ea n eps aed 294 Customer Assistance sss 693 Data Recorder Event 0000000000 eee 86 Daytime Running Lights 0 206 Dealer Services gcc i ace Pe RR e ed ea s 629 Defroster Rear Window 2 0 0 0 000 ene 305 Defroster Windshield l
5. 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all o
6. CONTENTS 2 ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 14 Hi VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 HP POUPE aie hh ayiny Sealine dunt de dtu 2 Key Fob eee een 15 Rearming The System pastiga a ns ee rea i 21 Removing Key Fob From Ignition 16 To Arm TheSystem ccs so issc cssr wras 21 Key In Ignition Reminder ooo 18 sini hela ccna inte eee M SENTRY KEY issssssssss eee 19 Ss taal a a Replacement Keys isses 20 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY 23 Customer Key Programming 20 M REMOTE BEXLESS ENTRY IREEP acidipaqua t a O General Information 2 4 20 TO Unc MN DOS Kao sra qe dep etn 2 To Lock The Doors sse 26 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Using The Panic Alarm Programming Additional Transmitters Transmitter Battery Replacement General Information ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote Start DOOR LOCKS Power Door Locks Child Protection Door Lock System Rear ll KEYLESS ENTER N GO ll WINDOWS Power Windows Wind Buffe ng eset re em 46 LIFTGATE sceuepex oC ey CHOR IRE 47 Liftgate Flipper Glass 0 48 Power Liftgate If Equipped 49 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 2246244021 a220 4 5
7. Language English Language French Language Spanish Language Dutch e Language Deutsch e Language Italian e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command Sve button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command Sve button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts
8. Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20 Amp Power Seat M19 25 Amp Automatic Shut Yellow Module s Natural down 1 and 2 Adaptive Cruise M20 15 Amp Instrument Cluster Control Audio Blue THE M21 20 Amp Automatic Shut Daytime Running Yellow down 3 Lights Relay Air Suspension M22 10 Amp Horns Low High Module Instrument Red Right M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Left Red Controller M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper M18 15 Amp Stop Lamp Natural Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M25 20Amp Fuel Pump Motor M29 10 Amp Tire Pressure Moni Yellow Output Diesel Lift Red tor If Equipped Pump Export M30 15 Amp J1962 Diag Only Blue Connector M26 10 Amp Driver Door Switch M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps Red Bank Yellow M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Wireless Control Red Controller pone eri M33 10 Amp Powertrain ntry Modute Red Controller M28 15 Amp Powertrain Transmission Blue Controller Controller Transmission Controller 670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description CAUTION tridge Fuse Fuse e When installing the totally integrated power mod le cover it is important to ensure the cover is M34 10 A Pa
9. e The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If you are creating your own files the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps Variable bit rates are also supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1kHz or 48kHz To change the current file use the remote control s or DVD player s A button to advance to the next file or the V button to return to the start of the current or previous file To change the current directory use the remote con trol s PROG Up and Down buttons es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423 Disc Errors Display If the DVD player is unable to read the d
10. 060533364 1 Mount the road tire on the axle Stowed Spare EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight ness of each lug nut is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 610 WH
11. 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 530 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE Deus loaded onthe vehtes That weiss may not The following table shows examples on how to calcu safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of
12. MRXC4W4MA4 2546A C4W4MA4 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline 800dfabs having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis m 4m sions regulations and provide satisfactory ao fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING STARTING AND OPERATING 555 performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC
13. Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031563345 Windshield Wiper Operation 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when A weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031563345 Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles the off position
14. 9 REG E ORIYWG PY S RS Inspection obw bns ipEETS RENT ERES aes PretensionerS 0 0 cee eee eee Reminder 4 4 83 30 a eh RE CL Ret S Shoulder Belt Anchorage 716 INDEX ae Untwisting Procedure 000 61 Sedis 5 ar aaa a donde ir ben aar ad RC RP Rc frites 177 AGJUSIMENE amp iesszrizsn e xm end E 182 Easy Entty ss hd RR Roe e DR n go x 200 Memory cxx geek ese eae te CERE RO eies 195 POWER acc dtr cR es Rb RUPES E dare GA erate aa 180 Rear Folding 4325324 04 har Re 193 Reclining ios dass xxu euer s 183 Security Against Thefts etse na sa eeur anae 21 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Geler errai 2 12 244445004 E EARNER ESES 488 Sentry Key Immobilizer onana anaua 19 Sentry Key Programming noaa ananena reaa 20 Sentry Key Replacement 0004 20 Service Assistante ke cbe y dr ErIYA EH 693 Service Contact sees spa REIR XU Rx RES 695 Service Manuals ze RR ase RE RR Re 698 settings Personal 3x3 heo ex eR ee 350 petting the Clock sp oe deer e eua 360 Shif ng cue Ee Re races RR See a ad 460 Automatic Transmission 4060 Shift Lever Override llle 616 Shoulder Belts llle 56 Side Airbag exe erbe eats ree ne RD 81 Signals TU vu aces eoa eee IR E drea 118 SmartBeams so enro taana llle 205 Snow Chains Tire Chains isses 542 Snow PlOW uude RR da ESO RUE Ve d d xus 585 SHOW TIES e eeru e eaa ea ac hm G
15. Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and rel
16. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil
17. iac ex aem oe Re c gud 625 Compartment Identification 625 Cooling 244 55 aed de b eA de GP we d 644 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 020 000 52 Fails to Start cies RR RE Ree eid 457 Flooded Starting ais een 457 Fuel Requirements 2455 Ri esce RE e 555 Jump Starting 6 eee ee 609 il cena eh ehh te ee td eho ea Ge Ute ce OA 631 Oil Filler Cap eroe Sehr HLR RR Reged 633 Oil Selection seges nga red ohne dace 632 Oil SynthetiC iis rw Sete seed ood ERG Reda 633 Overheating opes Ree peras 598 Olar hg isses bee ling Sines ae end 453 Temperature Gauge 0 0 0 324 Engine Oil Viscosity 2 6 eee eee 633 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 200 633 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 83 Entry System Illuminated 00 23 en INDEX 707 Ethanol merser ama eaten cs decr we de don arated 556 Event Data Recorder 000 0 cena 86 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 52 Exhaust System tcc cae he data ee ae Cae es 115 Exterior Lights recle ud eR e eiu 118 Filters Aur Cleaner sw ce dea ka RE EEG 634 Air Conditioning ille 638 Engine Oll 4 scere e p quos een edes ed 634 Engine Oil Disposal lille 634 Flashers 2 M d oce xa bx CR Ge deae s 598 Hazard Warning 2 0 0 eee eee 598 Turm Signal uude eo nie dye E cep nes 118 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range z sekcoeie mea esea AA pik 563 Engine Qil eec accep a Ioh e s 562 F
18. phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES If Equipped Getting Started e Screen located in the overhead console Unfold the overhead LCD screen by pushing the button in the center of the overhead console behind the screen Overhead Video Screen With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position turn the radio on by pushing the ON OFF Volume Control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted into the VES player the screen turns on automati cally the headphone transmitters turn on and play back begin
19. Do not overfill Use ONLY the recommended fluid see Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts for fluid specifications After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION If the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading Run the engine at idle in PARK to warm the fluid 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedu
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until
21. Engine Coolant 324 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 0000000 302 Tilt Steering Column 00000005 220 Tire and Loading Information Placard 527 Tire Markitips s am Seed e Sle Bs Be ag wie id 520 jc U AI 118 Aging Life of Tires iles 540 Aur Pressures sasea tana tanh aka Grace oR 532 Chains uuacchswaoesera Gabe no pe Y e 542 Compact Spare 1 6 ee eee 537 General Information llle 532 High Speed dee remet ancy Sales wad 535 Inflation Pressures 0 0 00 533 Life of Tires 2 ee es 540 718 INDEX eee boad Capacity 2323299 39 RR ng 527 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 545 Pressure Warning Light 318 Quality Grading ies akataa a cats aiia 699 Radial cue iue e RE REN RE a 535 Replacement 2 densa tee une e erae 541 Rotation s s mie dg eet dda dae ta Rh ces 544 Safety i i sve andes a erroseta r m Rd is 520 SIZ6S orina deed ru ice ee om FARA e des 522 SNOW TOS uxo eds osea eae R M endete ds 536 Spare THE Pr ER 600 Spinning 22 ies eee eee o oh Rd 539 Trailer Towing 5229 e Re e RR 580 Tread Wear Indicators llle 540 Tire Safety Information lille 520 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 577 Tow Haul Indicator Light 00 317 Tow Hooks Emergency 2 0 lle 615 TOWING a awe he ace Y ode aeaa iaae asi 570 24 Hour Towing Assistance sess 154 Disabled
22. IF EQUIPPED 004 359 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 359 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped lt s smes sses aeisi 359 E UCONNECTS 130 i e sodi thas Res 359 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 359 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD Notes on Playing MP3 Files 364 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 367 Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 368 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 369 Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play i e oos 374 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 377 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play 379 INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play 379 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped iere hr RR ES 380 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Teepe semet ESTER RIPE 384 And MP3 Audio Play 00 363 Bi iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 385 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While bun m 385 A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 400 Using This Feature llle 386 Important Notes For Single V
23. If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player a Password screen is displayed In order to watch the disc the rear passen ger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below To play all discs without requiring a password set the DVD player s rating to Level 8 Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc Not all DVD discs encode a Rating so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password The default rating is Level 8 play all discs without a password and the default password is 0000 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425 Please input a 4 digit password E t t x Sel ENTER Carce RETURN DVD Password Entry 426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss To set the password activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions e Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but tons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Password and then press the remote control s ENTER button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTE
24. MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency KHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may ta
25. NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected p RES ONIOFF CANCEL SET Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the ve hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 18 mph 30 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off When in Four Wheel Drive Low When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Activate Push and release the ON OFF
26. Nostalgia Nostalga T ee 16 Digit Character Oldies Oldies Display Personality Persnlty No program type or None Public Public undefined Rhythm and Blues R amp B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Porn Typ 16 Digit Character SETUP Button Display Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Sports Sports the following items Talk Talk Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow Top 40 Top 40 you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the Weather Weather TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Ty
27. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three sec onds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting sys
28. Terrain Settings Sand Mud Terrain Settings Snow Terrain Settings Sport Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required e To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low Terrain System Settings Not Available Raising Vehicle Ride Height with icon Lowering Vehicle Ride Height with icon Normal Vehicle Ride Height This message is dis played for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Normal Vehicle Ride Height Off Road Ride Height Level 1 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 1 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 e e e e Off Road Ride Height Level 2 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 2 Vehicle Lowered To Entry Exit Park Height This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Park Height Entry Exit Park Height in Progress This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the request is made to go into Entry Exit Height while the vehicle speed is between 15 and 25 mph This shows that the request has been recognized and will lower to Entry Exit height when vehicle is below 15 mph Service Air Suspension Syst
29. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 Cruise Control Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC if equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is displayed in the menu line also Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information If equipped with ACC one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or following conditions change If ACC is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the ACC status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line For vehicles with Cruise one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or conditions change If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the Cruise status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button u
30. a a a ER Reformulated Gasoline 556 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0 540 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends i52 eei 556 Life Of Tire sicher ER eS 540 85 Usage In Non Flex Fadl Vehicles 556 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 MMT In Gasoline 0 000040 557 Maintenance osse saad eee o reves 563 Materials Added To Fuel 558 B ADDING FUEL REF RRRE RS 564 Fuel System Cautions seoce cc cesarean anns 558 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 564 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 559 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 567 E FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF B VEHICLE LOADING 0 567 SEE a Certification Label 00 567 E 85 General Information 560 E TRAILER TOWING EHanpPNUdl 95 s wes gus idoneas 201 Common Towing Definitions 570 Musis Mu M RA M D a Trailer Hitch Classification isses 575 iiim Of og Oi Fo Fs ol Md caps Tong Weg Monum Tle Weight Ratings sees 576 prin 3 6 CREER 563 Trailer And Tongue Weight 577 CRIs a qraendiatge het aan awa ee Towing Requirements 0 04 578 Replacement Parts 040 563 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing lips ies em mee es 584 B SNOW PLOW o4susi e eser REX 585 ll REC
31. after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To Disarm The System make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the The Vehicle S Al bed d f key is physically removed from the ignition EE CAI aoe ane See the following methods 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless vehicle Entry RKE transmitter Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same information exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyle
32. devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio device and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys tem as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command EVR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When
33. do so for themselves If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 010107716 1 Volume Control 2 Power Button 3 Channel Selection Switch 4 Power Indicator es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE e When both switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 1 When both switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 2 Press the MODE button on the remote control If the video screen is displaying a video source such as a DVD Video pressing DISPLAY shows the status on a popup banner at the bot
34. press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and rele
35. replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as ee STARTING AND OPERATING 539 your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than
36. the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SETUP Button
37. 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play es UNDERSTANDING Y
38. 2 0 ee eee eee 24 Keyless GO essa ie ees EU dede gs 14 Key Programming 6 6 eee eee 20 Key Replacement c3 63b scc ma rs e qe 20 KEYS TUTTI 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer lt es acess aenaran 19 Lane Change Assist 24499 be b pP isi ses 213 Lap Shoulder Belts lille 56 Latches 2c toe Rae eee AES BR ee eS 118 Lead Free Gasoline ecd te nampeni na a nRa ir 555 Leaks Pld 2 u ob ax e od E Pss 118 Lite ot Tires c icd ee Lotsa s E Rue 540 Liftgate eee hio Er RS o xe d 47 Liftgate Flipper Glass 0 2 00 02 0004 48 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 304 Light Bulbs gt isses go Rage 118 lighis nur cda ey qu ams deg qu S Coe d gata aca 118 Aithag xx c Rae RR REC es 80 Ant Eock a cones Ce xe men cuchee aoe 322 Automatic Headlights 204 Back Ups cost etae bats te oett Sede cond 675 Brake Assist Warming sesei essani ismana 519 Brake Warning ssec Rea dere E Resorts 320 en INDEX 711 Bulb Replacement 0 0000 672 Rear Servicing acea kx ho o set ea d 675 Cargo sodes Ait tee ange em dept RURSUS vr its 299 Rear Tail Js caine n data hub bat quiae EUR mia 675 Center Mounted Stop 000 677 SeatBelt Reminder 040 320 Daytime Running es e uomen 206 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 324 Dimmer Switch Headlight 203 SOFVICE acre seh eS a we BR ae OR d d 672 Electronic Stability Program
39. ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turni
40. After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE Incorrect Way Of Grabbing The Keyless Enter N Go transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the Door Handle vehicle s interior door panel With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position 021909602 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle
41. CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compartment Y esses Center Console USB AUX Connector Port 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE The center console will have a position where the iPodt or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when clos ing the lid A factory cut out space for the cable to be routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid If a cut out is not ava
42. Do In Emergen cies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press and hold the brake pedal 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 2 Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages E STARTING AND OPERATING 459 The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled a
43. ESP Indicator 519 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 315 Exteri r 2 deg p pes CERES eed oe de 118 Side Marker 4 ar re d 675 FOB se go a pe quiu ee deis aa aca 317 SmartBeams 6 eee 205 Hazard Warning Flasher 598 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 318 Headlights 0 0 00 eee 672 Tow Haul Indicator sess 317 Headlights On With Wipers 204 Traction Control s cs ocr es etes 519 High Beam Indicator 05 317 Tura Signal ix2 wipbossk eeaaa sas wheal ales 118 Hill Descent Control Indicator 317 Vanity Mirror aan a a Aa 130 Illuminated Entry 0 0000 23 Loading Vehicle measair iea oeat 567 LOW Fuel 2 i 94e9M eb RR ES 336 WES pecu Shoes ease ee eae YE a dd 527 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 3915 LOCKS ca 4c dads baa n M ha eee TERES 34 Map Reading access xke reote nes 210 Automatic DOO ise x Rea 36 Passing eux s emp eo heh ee RR Re pac 213 Child Protection az edt e ob naka 4 36 Reading aad eap ka eer vd Ras dea 210 DODI iube ede RE Goda nk Bane a RE des 34 712 INDEX ee Power Door 2 2 2 d em o mg rai 35 Lubrication Body de eere 639 Maintenance Free Battery 00 635 Maintenance Procedures llli 630 Maintenance Schedules ieac toant dawaa iaaa 684 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 315 Manual Service 0 0 0 eee eee
44. Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ROCK g NEUTRAL N Switch 8 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 9 Start the engine 10 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 592 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 11 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure 16 Release the parking brake i hicl tust eres mo veele MOVelnent 17 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it 12 Turn the engine OFF then turn the ignition switch away from the negative battery post back to the ON RUN position without starting the NOTE engine e Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must 14 Shift the transmission into PARK continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before press ing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released 13 Firmly apply the parking brake Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine The
45. Gallons 94 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWY
46. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to 464 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau WARNING Continued tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill s grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If WARNING your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to Continued move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is i
47. OF YOUR VEHICLE M Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right To Raise Rear Seat Md Ro DE Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stabil ity for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down Rear Seat Folded position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 030909671 Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever j 030909670 Rear Seat Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death
48. OFF 010533317 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped INTRODUCTION 9 VIN This number also appears on the Automobile Infor mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment 010809610 VIN Location 10 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death pm Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49. Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button Following
50. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 5 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available s 2 To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear uc seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages Tether Strap es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint ALAA LLL 4 For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
51. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions ram For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in Start ing and Operating for further information on the vari ous positions and their intended usages 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for fur ther information on the various positions and their intended usages Shifting Procedures 4WD HI To 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AW
52. Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Starting And Operating for additional information Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 than one message to step through the remaining stored messages Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Oper ating for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher prio
53. Vehicle cecce sien RIS 617 Guid s ocu tr ME dete ad dedu 576 Recreational bee Rr RR EX Hbi 586 Weight usse ins Bene teure EU ee des 576 Towing Assistance sss ec s een 154 Traction Control 508 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 0 513 Trailer TOWING ies oes ieee eae PG 570 Cooling System Tips 00 0005 585 Hitches i RR ems 575 Minimum Requirements sess 578 Trailer and Tongue Weight 577 WINS 26d ebeees a RS UNO PA ene nhs ERE 582 Trailer Towing Guide llle 576 Trailer Weight is cse km tete RR RR 0n 576 Transfer Case v obe CRAT Pe es eed 653 Maintenance css guess RR RR RE ERU RE 653 a INDEX 719 Transmission AXutomalie 4 eR a be Brahe aR aaa gS aS dnd 462 Maintenance 2 0 0 0 ee eee 654 SHIN uode cete Sate Gates Mena are wie eed 460 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 27 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 270 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Tread Wear Indicators llli 540 Tur Signals setate e bg ER deu tp 317 UCI Connector oss send ooh eee ee RES SSS ES 385 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 699 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 385 Universal Transmitter llle 270 Unleaded Gasoline llle 555 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 61 Vanity MITTS ker pk e P
54. WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will 5 appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator 494 STARTING AND OPERATING EE lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions
55. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M AM FM Button Press
56. a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are re corded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi gation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M There are different sizes and types of restraints for WARNING children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child In a collision an unrestrained child can become a seat Owner s Manu
57. a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The power window switches radio power sunroof if CAUTION Continued equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either OFF position Opening either front door will cancel e Jump Start the vehicle this feature The time for this feature is programmable Charge the battery Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION e If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or th
58. a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 571 WARNING Continued you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer 572 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Sway Control The trailer s
59. and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Some models may be equipped with manual front driver or passenger seats The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjustment Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment WARNING Recline Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Heated Seats If Equipped Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the equipped with heaters
60. and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a par
61. appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual es STARTING AND OPERATING 511 path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting
62. area 035209525 035209531 Door Panel Storage Storage Compartment To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on the small latch located on the lid UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 035209532 Storage Compartment Latches Lower Storage Compartment Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the WARNING lower storage compartment Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices Continued 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Press in on the flashlight to release it o M p jc p lt Press And Release To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off Three Press Switch 035410217 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 Cargo Storage Bins There are four removable storage bins located
63. as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft Ibs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overti
64. been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 548 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will mon
65. covering both windows on the impact side N 1 022640121 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during WARNING deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy should remain free from any obstructions The system includes side impact sensors that are cali e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects brated to deploy the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side between you and the SAB the performance could Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require be adversely affected and or objects could be side air bag occupant protection pushed into you causing serious injury Continued 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued e SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or kil
66. cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert the key Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote Start Active Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Remote Start Co
67. damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE x Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature approximately 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid can not be held comfortably between the fingertips Use the following procedure to check the fluid level properly 1 2 Park the vehicle on level ground Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 6 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level
68. disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Dual
69. does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required STARTING AND OPERATING 517 Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in ROCK mode ROCK mode is only available in 4WD LOW range Hill Descent Switch When HDC is enabled the HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level when necessary on grades greater than approximately 876 It will usually not activate on level ground 518 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC Operation In 4WD Low Range To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terra
70. engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 472 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal th
71. enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automa
72. exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate th
73. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the 554 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses
74. fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 056810679 Fuel Filler Cap 566 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Push down on the in
75. gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine 614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode uM before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be Control in Starting And Operating for further infor tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain Off switch again to restore ESC On mode damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued
76. has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and the shift lever is locked in PARK when
77. highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen L1 SAT WEATHER L2 ISSN IDE AM DISC FM ENTE SAT Ves DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 Enter to Select ons Select FM Mode On The VES Screen Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate s Lo MUTE Preset 10 WEATHER Fi The Weather Channel hi The Weather Channel PA Mother Nature 00 00 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE video is playing on Channel 1 touch the 2 soft key and LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen choose an audio source To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the left screen Rear VES Controls by Favorites 00 12 E nsc TRK 1 of 109 DISC AUX1 2 DVD Video Menu pu Display Setting FER My Files DVD Setup Fm Screen Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp egporfaut View Picture Ben M Audio Control us View 010107721 AUX AUX2 SCAN INFO 12 00 LOCK Rear VES Soft Key Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The Media Column 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS Important Notes For Single Video Screen System Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio e VES i
78. ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the 15 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no tow bar position indicator lights will be on or flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 593 A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light 8 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object indicates that shift requirements have not been met press and hold the recessed transfer case NEU TRAL N button located by the selector switch for one second Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle Firmly apply the parking brake Reconnect the negative battery cable Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position oT A c N Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal NEUTRAL N Switch 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL a 594 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEU TRAL N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 After the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button 10 After the NEU
79. in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Remote Linked to Memory feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memor
80. in both the seat cushions and recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to seatbacks the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into WARNING place e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 030933466 Fold Flat Passenger Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel belo
81. in the event of a collision ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint em 030907490 Push Button 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head uu 030907
82. in the rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area Rear Storage Bins 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the load floor to the liftgate opening THs 035409797 Lower Storage Bins 035409796 Tether Strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo Continued 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Rear Cargo Tie Downs The rear cargo tie downs
83. instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range STARTING AND OPERATING 471 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to
84. intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifuncti
85. interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 505 If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ul Parking Brake 506 STARTING AND OPERATING EMm When the parking brake is applied with the ignition parking brake should always be applied whenever the switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in driver is not in the vehicle the instrument cluster will
86. is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 589 CAUTION Continued e Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in a forward direction Towing this ve hicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case e The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Continued New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into NEUTRAL N WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N Continued 590 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts fr
87. is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a
88. is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fasc
89. latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pulling Caz up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate To operate the power liftgate manually in the open direction pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put liftgate into manual mode 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee When the LIFTGA
90. leave the vehicle Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do notleave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors 021809604 Power Door Lock Switch If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped When e
91. local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its WARNING first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and e Do not leave children or animals inside parked not interpreted as an indication of difficulty vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death SAFETY TIPS e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Transporting Passengers inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly E THINGS TO
92. located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving N cum Sy OT LY 035409795 Rear Cargo Tie Downs ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303 WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This coul
93. next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is WARNING another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB CAUTION device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system guidelines Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors To get into the BTSA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect
94. not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline co
95. not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has spare tire is mounted incorrectly been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 060633619 Mounting Spare Tire 608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EMm 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray soon as possible properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft lbs 5 N m reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve 12 Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo area hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation
96. often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind
97. on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
98. only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the amp e button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owne
99. pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds an Inflate to XXX message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR STARTING AND OPERATING 551 Ffi Tire Pressure 33 33 33 33 PSI Omi E RUN 055838588 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the Inflate to XXX message T
100. priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the e Press the w button to begin Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 Call By Saying A Name After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call Dial By Saying A Number After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook e Press the w button to begin 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a e Automatic download and update if supported begins name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you he vehicle The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then BONES VEN dial the corresponding phone number which may A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down appear in the display of certain radios loaded and updated every time a phone
101. problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection WARNING The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine
102. radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 To program the two remaining HomeLi
103. result in serious injury or death EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 031409529 Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight D switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position WW 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to a
104. right rear cargo area N A Center Console Outlet Ld Rear Power Outlet 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The rear power outlet can be switched to bat tery powered all the time by switching the power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel 072736476 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of hi
105. rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 563 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equ
106. s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the S button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 3 SMS Send or Send Message You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the amp vRbutton while the syst
107. tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road character
108. the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 540 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to h
109. the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center 11 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the T
110. the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Sve button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the e button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 e When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the vk button and say Se lect or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This fea
111. the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of pl
112. the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has
113. the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into PARK 4 Turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob from the ignition switch 5 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position 588 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac l9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL N position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground Recreational Towing Quadra Trac IIe Quadra Drive Il Four Wheel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow ing The NEUTRAL N selection button
114. the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA input jacks located on the back of the center console Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions 1 Video In Yellow 2 Left Audio In White 3 Right Audio In Red 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When connecting an external source to the AUX input be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicles Owner s Manual for more information Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at the video screen highlight VES AUX 1 by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER on the Remote Control s MUTE Preset 10 2 E33 WEATHER EH Select Mode AM DISC FM AUX SAT Ves DISC HDD lease B
115. the wipers will operate for several wipe after the end of the lever is released and then resume the cycles then turn off intermittent interval previously selected WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make 031563350 occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end Windshield Washer Operation of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031563345 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay p
116. to USB Once in the iPod9 USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e e during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playin
117. to XXX message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds For each subsequent ignition 550 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE switch cycle a chime will sound a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five sec onds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire
118. to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 313 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 314 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 315 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC seleseles eese 325 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays is ek reas 327 EVIC White Telltale Lights sss 334 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 336 EVIC Red Telltale Lights suus 337 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 340 Fuel Economy Cruise Control Vehicle Sp ed os ind Eve edes 343 Trip Info scarna serito ede rose og es 344 Units 634 fete ee aa Ee gor opa oe 344 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 345 Tire PSI os uei cu adonde RES PR e gg 345 Messages d vasos 265 dp dees E RR aS 346 Turn Menu OFF 4 4 9 saw ae T ey 347 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Keyless Enter N Go Display It Equipped 3 ik dde xe rn pe ca 347 Compass Temperature Display 347 Customer Programmable Features System Setup sess dere ros deban 350 E UCONNECT 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV
119. to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studio
120. use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up en INTRODUCTION 7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section i contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 8 INTRODUCTION jm i A CEL ti ig eloj 3 g 3 z Q UNCT i 5 3 i916 E ca J 1 1 LI Ch 7 HDs tolo iy 3 pd i E Tol E el BOE ARBAO ANO WASHER E RIRBRG ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ADJUSTABLE LECTRONI PEDALS SPEED C I a H e TIRE PRESSURE WILL OESCENT MONITOR CONTROL AWD fLtCTRONC ALL WHEEL BILITY CONTROL ont A 4WD 2 THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL CONTROL DRIVE ws voct RECOGNITION WARMING BUTTON AU UCONNECT HAZARD BUTTON m AIC PUSH SEE OWNER AR MANUAL BO CONDITIONER CONTROL
121. wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they WARNING can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat from the ve
122. while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook Delete e Press the e button to begin e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will deleted ask you which designation you wish to delete home Note that only the phonebook in the current language work mobile other or all Say the designation you is deleted wish to delete Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited language is deleted List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted ar edited e Press the e button to begin 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the E vRbut ton during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone i
123. will not illuminate Overtaking Approaching 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service U fi Stationary Objects UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Opposing Traffic 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP D
124. your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 531 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs B11a4d11 532 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire f
125. 000 128 000 c 80 000 144 000 90 000 160 000 S 100 000 176 000 192 000 120 000 208 000 c5 130 000 224 000 140 000 240 000 amp 150 000 Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt Replace the air conditioning filter x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt Replace spark plugs 3 6L engine Replace spark plugs 5 7L engine Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 M 688 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEMM l Mileage or time passed o o o o o o o o e e e e 2 2 N i i S 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 T whichever comes first T T T E e e o o o r s 8s9sgsgsse ss s 25 s8 S 8 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o lololo 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e 8 8 8882 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 E SFIS FI 8 8 5 9 R8 R S 3 Change automatic transmission fed fluid and filter if using your ve X S hicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing P Change automatic transmission X L fluid and filter 3 Change transfer case fluid X S Inspect and replace PCV valve if X 8 necessary The spark plug chang
126. 2 Lap Shoulder Belts ss ran cadeno ae aiee 56 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 57 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 61 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 61 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 62 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped ucc s ene enter is cd 63 Energy Management Feature 64 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 64 Event Data Recorder EDR 86 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 65 Child Restraints esce err Reed 87 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 113 2 ee e pape aan eye enn at 6 E SAFETY TIPS 00000 0c eee 114 Seat Belt Locke Lii es eode eds gd adios d Transporting Passengers llle 114 Peek Pees Ne Eisen WORE ese perit Exhaust Gas isses 115 Seat Belt Extender 00000000 71 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Supplemental Restraint System SRS Dp nn s3 04 54a tbo eibaginse ea ects 116 Ait Bags those od ces e mea p RES haa OA 72 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Advanced Front Air Bag Features 74 Outside The Vehicle 04 118 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 79 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD
127. 2 22 x Rae ea eas 336 Materials Added llle 558 Methanol 299m rk RERIB R3 ed RE 556 Octane Rating i e ces genos 555 Requirements asserta eb ce hd 555 Saver Mode 22 ped Ee aye EREE 341 Tank Capacity iae x ERR e seas vd 678 Fuel Flexible 0 ees 560 Fu ling 22e Lek pg e DA RE RT ES 564 Fuel Optimizer xe dod ee ER RS ees 341 F el Saver o uu t3 3 ence PHOT Dac a s 341 Fuel System Caution sedita aE a pe 565 E s6s 42 3333094 Rp o pug PusdeRr 24 aed 664 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 270 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap lille 564 Gasoline Clean Air llle 556 Gasoline Fuel llle 555 CONServing eat as gui pee RP Ars 341 Gasoline Reformulated 00005 556 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 324 Fuel ccs seca seers ete es Freda Na d d 323 Speedometer sss ze ere nui 323 Tachometer llle 315 en INDEX 709 Gear Ranges assess uos aee e wo ee Pac d 463 Gear Select Lever Override 616 General Informations 5442442 20d RE E miss 20 Glass Cleaning css doge eps oe wh ae c d 662 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 571 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 570 GVWR eae Pek bo ber REG foigsi re PEU a 568 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 598 Head GIS ss i is gun erre Re HE Re ae a d 672 Bulb Replacement 0040 673 Cleaning a ctclestageteegie tee ad 662
128. 2 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION Loser nesan oes bera suat u rbasietka ree gU Read abide EU 3 HN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sse eee 11 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE see 119 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ise 309 s STARTING AND OPERATING aua Deuda Ropa ev deeper weke Dacia v pa ead a odd 447 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 even so ee Ec RE EE TTE EI RCRUE BURG nage 597 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 5394 3 CEA EDU RERUM SUC SU EUR R 623 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 46e id tud ces PR ERES VC Ede UE mand Rr kd 683 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 256 ebrei RE E REX RERET CREE RR a 691 9 INDEX 701 10 Information Provided by DENER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS M INTRODUCTION 000 4 B WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 9 E ROLLOVER WARNING 00 5 Wi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 9 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 7 Wi VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 10 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perfor
129. 24 HIEOIFOTUG ROMS AHORADISNT sa keener ua Tire Terminology And Definitions 526 Electronic Stability Control ESC 510 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 527 Trailer Sway Control TSC 513 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 532 PUT OSE GSE MOD cea biu a Aan an alt Tire Pressure s ey cae as RETRO ae 532 Beady aa IE a ia ala Tire Inflation Pressures cene keai eenia 533 450 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 535 Replacement Tires siasa sasso aeia i aea 541 Radial Ply Tires ised Re RE 535 W TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 542 All Season Tires If Equipped 535 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 544 Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 536 lil TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 545 Snow Tires ecs eccoci tieri Ee uad 536 Base System 4a persasat sediet 548 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Premium System If Equipped 550 Bc VyDech TE EUIDEGG e setae Saag eae 397 General Information 554 i lis Here Tues e EHE a qms 937 W FUEL REQUIREMENTS 05 555 Full Size Spare If Equipped 538 3 6L Engine If Equipped 555 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 538 5 7L Engine If Equipped 555
130. 277 Ignition OFF Operation ssec erea sess 283 Troubleshooting Tips 000 278 E COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER General Information 279 SEE FEUER se Opes eele sake s E POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 280 Opening Sunroof Express 284 Opening Sunroof Express 281 S n SUDIDOLE S Manta MOG aiite ease dis Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 284 Closing Sunroof Express 284 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 285 M STORAGE ier ek mem eem Opening Power Shade Express ERN 285 Glove Compartment deg ribus dot Bey ose We Saar More Opening Power Shade Manual Mode 285 DoorStor ge s t as Closing Power Shade Express 285 MM LEE Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 285 E CARGO AREA PESTURES Rechargeable Flashlight Pinch Protect Feature go esi cagat mae asa 286 Cargo Storage Bins sessi ma esege tareas 299 Wind Buffeting 0 6 6 0 0 eee eee 286 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped 301 Sunroof Maintenance 04 286 m Rear Cargo Tie Downs lesse 302 Ignition OFF Operation 287 ll REAR WINDOW FEATURES 304 Sunroof Fully Closed 04
131. 287 Rear Window Wiper Washer 304 ll ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 287 Rear Window Defroster 305 ll POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 292 ll ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 306 a CUPHOLDERS i RR rr 294 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced 030407085 by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated The mirror is twisted on the windshield b
132. 332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Shared Modes The VES and radio are capable of communicating with each other This allows the VES to output radio audio to the headphones and the radio to output VES audio to the vehicle speakers When the radio and VES are in the same shared mode a VES icon will be visible on the radio s display and the shared icon will be visible on the VES screen When in shared mode the same audio source is heard in the headphones and vehicle speakers simultaneously If the radio functions FM AM or SAT are in the shared mode with the VES only the radio is able to control the radio functions In this case VES can share the radio 414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M mode but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VESTM selected radio mode When shared the radio has priority over the VES or all radio modes FM AM and SAT The VES has the ability to switch tuner AM FM SEEK SCAN TUNE and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode When in shared disc or satellite video mode both the radio and the VES have control of the video functions The VES has the ability to control the following video modes 1 CD Ability to Fast Forwar
133. 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Power Steering System Over Temperature If Equipped el If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message and a icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steer ing maneuvers may have occurred which UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system
134. 533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by quali 022607494 fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer Active Head Restraint Normal Position C UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re WARNING Continued straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are Starting Your Vehicle for further information struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active players These items may interfere with the opera Head Restraint is deployed tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a lo
135. 698 Memory Feature Memory Seat 195 Memory Seat csse ext oe blaring Pe er aos 195 Memory Seats and Radio 00 195 Methanol 00 00 cece eee eee 556 Mini Trip Computer 0 0 000 344 Mirrors 42m RU ret RE Shae ae ee eae 126 Automatic Dimming sss 127 Electric Powered 0 00000 e eee 129 Electric Remote 00000 a 129 Exterior Folding 4 ace as ease as a ete 128 Heated siste Ron bh a aie Hata tat 130 IPSIS fc sine hd hte anne ID E TELE 128 Rearview uh Beat Seen dikes RUE Enpa kik EOE Ree 126 Vanity amp 2cace bees eh b debian bade 130 Mode Fuel Saver uu ace ace Gee dene ace eg uet e 341 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 10 Monitor Tire Pressure System sss 545 Mopar Paris os Ree rera i e E 629 MTBE7ETBE 2a dX esL 556 Multi Function Control Lever 0 203 New Vehicle Break In Period 113 Occupant Restraints 000000004 52 Occupant Restraints Sedan 00 75 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 555 Odometet 2 64 cae he ee a E RE aq 318 Trip 4 8 baee ra gre Eae oa dined gia erben 318 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 496 en INDEX 713 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 496 Oil Change Indicator llle 340 Oil Change Indicator Reset sess 340 Oil Engine ares e co e Ronee Cacao ento 631 Capaci
136. A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 695 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract
137. ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON RUN position NOTE With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and
138. AT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury mmm Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap ger s front seat There are remote locations located under 2 Remote Negative Post the hood to assist in jump starting E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery po
139. Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
140. Bale ws 672 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 673 Front Turn Signal 4 isch ned 673 Front Fog Lamps 000 0000 674 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup amps 04 E5 He eo hes me RENE RE ed 675 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 676 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 677 Rear License Lamp 1 6 06 66s eee eens 677 E FLUID CAPACITIES iui dug dye need ed 678 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS vet OE PRR GEES deba e E epe e 679 ENGINE ss eese Hea Sans ae PES Eur OS 679 Chassis v Liege ded E HERR E Ped 680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 071410750 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sop
141. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground quao e ISTE haz lt lt Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools 060641337 6 Jack and Tool Assembly 604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M p um 1 n cu SLE AT just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on loca lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the tions other than those ind
142. C system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 520 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the g Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designat
143. CBA Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case Single Speed Quadra Trac I9 Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent Transfer Case Two Speed Quadra Trac II9 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier ad ditive Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine With Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 API GL5 or equivalent EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE 1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake
144. CLE 283 Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 CommandView Sunroof and Power Shade Switches The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never
145. Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turn ing the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours b
146. D LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Transfer Case Switch STARTING AND OPERATING 485 NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 4WD LOW To 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete 406 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE NOTE e If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Shifting into or out of AWD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occ
147. D LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the Continued WARNING Continued parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position
148. D LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires 500 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into AWD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or
149. DERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turn ing the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds es UNDERSTANDING
150. DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accom modate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons e The S button which is used to activate the memory save function e The 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Seat Switch HEE X UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Programming The Memory Feature NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not
151. Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains 468 STARTING AND OPERATING ME in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se lected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehi
152. Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued Continued 544 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the p
153. EAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the vehicle The following table shows the approximate center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch distances for each zone receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Continued check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkVie
154. EL 403 NOTE e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen 2 DVD Video Menu pep Display Setting FER My Files DVD Setup Fm Sereen Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp ey Pfau Vie System Setup Play Pause d Picture oc 5 Ma Audio Control x View Rear VES Soft key 3 Touch the 1 or 2 soft key and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 NOTE Remote Control To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote co
155. EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615 WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle 616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder located next to the shifter on the center console 4 Usin
156. EU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Ad justing the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to los
157. F YOUR VEHICLE SS ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status Park Assist Park Assist System System On off 032767410 Park Assist System OFF The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 032767405 three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist System ON UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 WARNING Object Detected WARNING Object Detected 032767408 032767407 Slow Tone Fast Tone 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ses The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display WARNING shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone Object The following chart shows the warning alert operation Detected when the system is detecting an obstacle 032767406 Continuous Tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will MUTE
158. Feature 128 ee ied Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Rear Cross Path 0 2 0 000 eee 138 Equipped esse riuet oe et 128 Modes Of Operation 0 0 139 Power Mirrors senres TCR d CR de 129 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED 141 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 130 Operation sos soe o eus hec ERR 143 Phone Call Features eese 150 Uconnect Phone Features 153 Advanced Phone Connectivity 158 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone ss sess e RR me 160 General Information 0 171 VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED 171 Voice Command System Operation 171 Commands eee ma RR Rma 173 Voice Training llle 176 SEATS siete d 4 oe rd genus ede REES 177 Power Seats If Equipped 178 Passenger s Power Seat lesus 180 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Lumbar If Equipped 181 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment 0 000000 000000 182 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline skp aa ra asnes goa 183 Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If EQUIPPCd ice cestri RR oss 184 Heated Seats If Equipped 184 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 187 Head Restraints sesos c
159. G YOUR VEHICLE 5 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to WARNING the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats to attach a child restraint tether anchor Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Center Seating Position For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 022633032 Top Tether Strap Mounting 6 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of
160. IN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indica
161. ING CONTENTS E STARTING PROCEDURES 453 Key Ignition Park Interlock 461 Automatic Transmission 453 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 461 Keyless Enter N Go 0000 454 Five Speed Automatic Transmission Normal Starting ssp Rn 455 Re OL Enpre ICPOIDDOU vest arated Gear Ranges esse oh ed ea Ee d a Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C LL 457 Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Engine Fails To Start 000 457 a a a a a ids D After Starting ciis 459 Sa ANG ce duum tpfe eae ie E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 459 ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION 482 E AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 460 Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 482 STARTING AND OPERATING M 448 Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 482 Shift Positions ners derat ekaa 483 Shifting Procedures er ri 484 Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 487 ll SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED 488 Description a 5e ee ea seses 488 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages esee 490 ll QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED 490 Description lle 490 Electronic Vehicl
162. INTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that open may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar such as steel wool or scouring powder that will cause that destroys the paint and protective coating scratch metal and painted surfaces have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint the owner and decals 660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be
163. If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp pow
164. In Canada Hsin tere Branesti Pg shes ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 692 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades sae ti ara oiea ta 00000 700 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 699 TOA W CAT oc xem hier ue3vewo vu S EEG 699 Temperature Grades lisse 700 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 693 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer
165. In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback 030909538 Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Switch 2 Seat Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Reclining The Seatback The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward move in the direction of the switch Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release when the desired position has been reached the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull ao i upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous will move in the direction of the switch Release the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of switch when the desired pos
166. Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR XXX i5s FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195 70R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 TIRE 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard
167. Jeep 22oO13 Grand Cherokee OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 201
168. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for
169. Level or Floor modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443 NOTE e Ifthe system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or c gt high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button Re circulation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if Defrost is selected Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort 444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss As the temperature g
170. M The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The ventilated seat switches are used to control the speed of the fans located in the seat Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated 030905581 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death
171. N AND MOBILE PHONES 431 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040109763 1 Air Outlet 6 Lower Switch Bank 11 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Hazard Switch 12 Fuel Door Release 3 Radio 8 Storage Bin 13 Headlight Switch 4 Glove Compartment 9 ESC Button 14 Dimmer Control 5 Climate Controls 10 Ignition Switch 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040367601 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Air Bag Warning Light e ry This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL tr The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON
172. NEL 351 to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK bu
173. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient Narrow Vehicles distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten S hicles traveli the outer ed f tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Wo DUE Papas ans Kuala bond cop the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 81869567 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Syst
174. NG YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency KHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are
175. OF YOUR VEHICLE 305 If the flipper glass is open the rear window wiper washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at that park position When the flipper glass is closed the rear wiper will resume wiper washer functionality after five seconds Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails ar
176. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehi
177. OUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 378 UNDERSTANDI
178. On With Wipers 0 0 0 0 arena Coenie a 204 PASSING 2e wears Bee chika g ed eq aah ds 213 Replacing debe mentee rma deaths TR ded 673 Heated Mirrors 3 3 0 3 5 ive emo oe ue ea 130 Cater uu angi a ee e don qd aa ne 432 Heater Engine Block s sest ee e e ee es 459 High Beam Indicator llle 317 Hill Descent Control lille 517 Hill Descent Control Indicator Hill Start Assist 242244 AT bee ans 514 Hitches Trailer Towing Holder Cups sers tuer recrear dps 294 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 270 Hood Release l l irr rine ai 201 snp EUER Key Ignition Key Removal llle sess Illuminated Entry 2 2 0 6 eee eee Immobilizer Sentry Key Infant Restraint Information Center Vehicle Inside Rearview Mirror 0 00002 Instrument Cluster Instrument Panel and Controls 710 INDEX EE Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 663 Integrated Power Module Fuses 664 Interior Appearance Care 0 0 0 0 661 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 216 Introduction 1 30005 428s EIS R he Bek ee ed 4 Inverter Power 0 eee 292 Jacking Instructions 2 6 2 0 0 0 0000 e ee 602 Jack Location 2e ettet eee aem x Re ars 599 Jack Operation ee s eire qu eter gas 602 Jump Starting etenen daai n aka E a 609 Key In Reminder xursan peau aona a eae FR E 18 Keyless Enter N Go 00000000004 38 Keyless Entry System 2 6
179. PANEL 337 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Oil Pressure Warning Light R7 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light Y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and
180. PG Ry E GR RYE EG pens 129 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 287 Seals i3 5a ue bu x EM ERU ES NE E 178 OLeerinp iu eub e deir Konsap ra RORIS S da s 501 SunloUl i222 05 5m 9 dE ea E Be See ere Dd 280 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 221 MandoWS sux e EG oes E CASES 43 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 70 Preparation for Jacking lille 601 Pretensioners Seat Belts usas fave ea dA eee 64 Programmable Electronic Features 350 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 24 Quadra Lift Quadra Trae 08 zs x aae p eee e eem ee 482 Radial Ply Dres icr aces semiasi xx was 535 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 647 Radio Operation 5 922 Re RIPE e bens 431 Radio Remote Controls sesiis maa aia a eadh 428 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sess 218 Rear Axle Differential lessen 652 Rear Camera cese ee A eub e REY s 265 Rear Cross Path 0 000 000 000000 138 Rear Cupholder s ise ci ree s 294 Rear Park Sense System 6 0 0 0002 256 Rear Seat Folding 00000 e ee eee 193 Rear Window Features 0 000 304 Rear Wiper Washer 0 0 0 00000 tarra 304 Reclining Front Seats 183 Recorder Event Data 000 000000008 86 Recreational Towing lees 586 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 589 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 593 Reformulated Gasoline
181. PMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size Continued 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Continued equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do n
182. Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN WARNING e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start displays IGNITION MODE OFF the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended Continued 458 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To
183. Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 iPod USB MP3
184. R The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 569 Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids i
185. R button If the password is correct the set password screen is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control s Right cursor button to select digits enter the new password After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427 To set the rating activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions Mark Using the remote control s Left and Right cursor buttons select the Rating tab Level YS No Limit 4 Highlight Change Rating and then press the remote control s ENTER button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits 9 6 5 4 3 Z e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is DVD Player Level Menu correct the Rating Level menu is displayed 428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons select the new rating level and then press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technol
186. RA RACCOON KKK 7047010 EEK EBD 053810760 Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range WARNING Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry pavement driveline damage may result 4WD LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding and crow hop use only on wet or slippery surfaces E Drivi
187. REATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME EIC x csee Rey eae es 586 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 586 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Sureste tees EUR Sha ede te ts 587 Recreational Towing Quadra Trac I Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models ros R RD RR PRI DS 588 Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive II Four Wheel Drive Models 588 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children and do not present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N belts Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could VACHES TENTER operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key a srt Automatic Transmission fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear number of reasons A child or others could
188. RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If thi
189. Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Con vertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Ch
190. S Oe E URS 536 Spare Tilers sradan Saone obese em eae dut ee 537 Speed Control Cruise Control 223 Speedometer sim arnee WEN stool Reine Erg 323 Startihg ass gee gee eee Ree eee eS 30 Automatic Transmission 453 Cold Weather 00 0000 eee eens 457 Engine Block Heater llle 459 Engine Fails to Start ses sameaa a taiete 457 Remote 6 06465 2S desis ahh ee ERR ERE rw Idas 30 en INDEX 717 Starting and Operating essi iess aeie neia iane 453 Starting Procedures ssa raci anana a KEE TERS 453 Steering POWER ac pay ad Qe eae a A eae dios a 501 Tilt Column derer esnea ainmh eie EE ea 220 Wheel Heated llle 222 Wheel Tilt eitera i y R3 i Patiri Sa 220 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 428 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 428 StOTage o coca ara eed eee 3 X RES LES 671 Storage Vehicle i i susce eed eb er e ema 444 Storing Your Vehicle csse csi llle 671 Sunglasses Storage 6 lees 270 Sun Roof i sac sas e ac mean 280 Sun Visor Extension lle 131 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 72 SUSPENSION AE scs cedes ER Roe eo ERROR Ro os d 490 Sway Control Trailer zs ree e en 513 Synthetic Engine Off lees eee 633 System RemoteStarting sisri ss sahaa aiias 30 Tachometei 2 9 Due ada 20 e E a d xu 315 Telescoping Steering Column 220 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 436 Temperature Gauge
191. SS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks power liftgate and flipper glass are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals
192. TANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map Reading Lights The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof the console These buttons are backlit for night time switches may also be included if equipped visibility 033333450 031433150 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031464435 Courtesy Lights 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunglasses Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates li
193. TARTING AND OPERATING ME To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be below 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal Clutch Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e
194. TE button on the RKE transmitter is WARNING pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash During power operation personal injury or cargo Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is chime will be audible For further information refer to clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched Customer Programmable Features System Setup before driving away Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel NOTE NOTE The power liftgate will not operate if the liftgate fli lass is open e In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an TES rae emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift 0 km h pate trium pansb e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice power liftgate functionality from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches e e e If anything obstructs the
195. TION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 697 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Cust
196. TRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch 11 Shift the transmission into PARK 12 Release the brake pedal 13 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 14 15 16 17 18 Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally The Keyless Enter N Go button if equipped may now be reinstalled if desired Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 595 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer e A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is relea
197. The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging 436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Con ditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures 045633435 While rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Also make sure to select only Panel BlI Level or Floor modes Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using a push button on the control unit and a comfort tem perature setting by using the temperature up and down buttons The system provides
198. Weather Ll Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 Enter to Select vt 044863155 The Weather Channel M Mother Nature 12 00 Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES 3 Touch the 1 soft key and then touch AUX 1 in the VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen 2 DVD Video Menu pu Display Setting FER My Files DVD Setup m Screen Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp EET View System Setup Play Pause Picture E M Audio Control xc View 010107721 Rear VES Soft Key column To exit press the back arrow soft key at the top of the screen Rear VES Controls Ves HDD DISC ARA AUX 1 AUX AUX2 12 00 Lock Select Channel Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Column 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to
199. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle After 5 minutes the system will cool and return to normal operation Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information NOTE Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli OFF sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Air Suspension Up m The air suspension up telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Operating Air Suspension Down The air suspension down telltale will illumi nate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Star
200. Zone Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045633437 Manual Temperature Control The Dual Zone Manual Climate Controls allow both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indi vidual comfort settings The controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control 045633440 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Controls e Driver Temperature Control 045633438 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the left front seat occu pant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures e Passenger Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the right front seat occupant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045633441 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gent
201. ad floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down ward on the head restraint to lower it 030933142 Rear Head Restraint WARNING Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING Continued collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat 7 030909670 Rear Seat Release NOTE e Do not fold the 6095 rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
202. ages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint 7 Ji You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap 4 between the seatback and seat cushion A Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages l RA behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will h h horages expose the top tether strap anchorag 022693428 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchora
203. aia pea o i oaa ana 154 Assist Hill Start 2 cn tac 085 er RR Ras 514 Auto Down Power Windows less 44 Automatic Dimming Mirror 127 Automatic Door Locks 000000 eee 36 Automatic Headlights llle 204 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 436 Automatic Transmission lees 462 Adding Fluid eb ae eaten denter cad 657 en INDEX 703 Fluid and Filter Changes 657 Fluid Change oe accents baat ofan eee a 657 Fluid Level Check 00 000 654 Rud Ty pet unes ee cate Seles eae 654 Special Additiv s ssec cR atate 654 AUTOSI ou naa Res m Gris ap Bose HAS n erattu dew 468 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 287 Auxiliary Power Outlet lille 287 battery ss by aS ales Eg e Pace em eas Dia ed 635 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 27 Belts Seat oss REF EE e p ege 56 Blind Spot Monitoring llle sss 131 Body Mechanism Lubrication sss 639 B Pillar Eocat ot 24492404 6241s ede RES 527 Brake Assist System anaana 00000000004 509 Brake Control System Electronic 507 Brake Fluid 4c esa ete ee saa baw oe 650 Brake System acea one hae RR e i 650 Anti Lock ABS esee kr dake apa 508 Fluid Check 4 2o 4i astennit esite niae 650 Master Cylinder i4 ace nne RERO Rod 650 Parking ge ee gere RP uS 505 Warning Light sean rr RR era 320 Brake Transmission Interlock
204. ailer Tow Control System Blue Lamps Park Lamps 666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J15 40 Amp Front Cabin Fan J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Green Blower Blue Control J17 40 Amp Starter Motor Sole J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module Green noid Natural J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control M1 15 Amp Stop Lamps Blue Module Powertrain Blue Control Module M2 20 Amp Electronic Limit Transmission Range Yellow Slip Differential J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor Air Suspension Yellow HI Radiator Fan M3 20 Amp Liftgate Headrest Motor Low Yellow J20 30 Amp Front Wiper M5 25 Amp 115V AC Power Pink Natural Inverter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667 Opener Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M6 20 Amp Cigar Lighter M11 10 Amp Heating Ventilation Yellow Red amp Air Conditioning M7 20Amp Power Outlet 42 Climate Control Yellow Switchable System M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier Yellow amp Steering Wheel Green M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats M13 20 Amp Instrument Cluster Yellow Yellow M10 15 Amp Video Universal M14 20 Amp Back Up Camera Blue Garage Door Yellow If Equipped 668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME
205. ailure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift le
206. air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean mended over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme Maintenance Free Battery diately with large amounts of water Refer to Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In You will never have to add water nor is periodic main Emergencies for further information tenance required Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore co
207. al to make sure you have the correct projectile inside the vehicle The force required to seat for your child hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child
208. allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second an
209. amined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Change Engine Oil
210. an and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional CAUTIONI rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals system in an emergency it should be re
211. an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on the driver s side should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for m1 locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key Wireless Ignition Node WIN with you when valet parking 1 OFF NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with 2 ACC ACCESSORY the security alarm armed will result in the alarm sound E ing Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm security alarm 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top or the Key Fob sideways with yowi thumband Piove the shitt lever in FARK Turn the Key Fob to the then pull the key out with your other hand OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporar ily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key 02020430 to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as Emergency Key Removal described If
212. and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 694 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center e Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9
213. ar driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 4 LOW For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 17 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 18 Fuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the s vehicle where the fuel door is located 19 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC White Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 21 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Amber Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber caution telltales For further information refer to Elec tronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 22 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Red Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell tales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicat
214. are tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire 538 STARTING AND OPERATING EMm Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be
215. art for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 576 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area icc D um cci ui 3 6L 4x2 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 3 6L 4x4 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg 5 7L 4x2 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 7 400 Ibs 3 357 kg 740 Ibs 336 kg 57L 4x4 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 720 Ibs 327 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of 3 700 Ibs 1 678 kg Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hi
216. ase the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside rearview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a
217. ase until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery n UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF NOTE POIEPER If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving ACC will maintain a fixed set speed convenience provided by cruise
218. at fits you best d Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se button verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far
219. audio device or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counter clockwise to get to the track faster e n List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the
220. authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Cruise Off When Park Brake is On ACC Cancelled Below Min Speed E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e e e e e e Coolant low Service air suspension system Oil change due Key in ignition Lights on Key in Ignition Lights On Ignition or Accessory On Ignition or Accessory On Lights On Turn signal on Park assist on Warning object detected Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote start active Insert Key and Turn to Run Remote start active Push Start Button Memory 1 profile set Memory 2 profile set Memory system unavailable Not in Park Memory system unavailable Seatbelt buckled Memory 1 profile recall Memory 2 profile recall Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e e e e e e e Function currently unavailable Power Liftgate Unlock to operate Power Liftgate Put in Park to operate Power Liftgate Automatic high beams on Automatic high beams off Service Four Wheel Drive System ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Terrain Settings Automatic Terrain Settings Rock
221. aximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represen
222. aying compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection o
223. be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 454 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP b
224. board edge of the left storage bin this will pop up the outboard edge 3 Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps 4 Remove the storage bin 5 Pull the release cable MT Z e A Z Release Cable Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message p If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area STARTING AND OPERATING 567 Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is in cluded on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN 568 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVW
225. brake pedal You depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL switch The speed of the vehicle goes below 15 mph 25 km h An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled 56789 mi 032433100 Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push the ON OFF button You turn OFF the ignition You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 30 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES
226. button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operatio
227. button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 56789 mi a A Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 032433097 To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed 032433098 ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal Driver Override Xe Om ACC 55 mph 032433099 Driver Override 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e e You softly tap the
228. call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 696 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMA
229. carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not 6 INTRODUCTION Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Av WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Rollover Warning Label BObfeOfO Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal
230. ccur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and re
231. check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows
232. cing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower an chorages No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to in stall a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor ages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes center position only 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion 60 40 Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchor
233. cipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the 510 STARTING AND OPERATING ME speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot Continued WARNING Continued prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
234. cle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the button on the right side of the chrome accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle 021833019 Liftgate Passive Entry Button E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in EVIC the liftgate and Flipper glass will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel To Lock The Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handles Outside Door Handle Lock Button 021871225 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE e
235. cle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 515 WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle WARNING If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 516 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued HSA is n
236. cle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left wil
237. cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and compo nent may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart Totally Integrated Power Module Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse J01 40 Amp Air Suspension Green ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J02 30 Amp Power Liftgate J08 40 Amp Power Seat Pink Module Green J03 30 Amp Trailer Tow J09 30 Amp E Brake Pink Pink J04 25 Amp Driver Door Node J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Natural Pink Relay Contact J05 25 Amp Passenger Door Jil 30 Amp Drive Train Control Natural Node Pink Module J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster Green Pump Stability Pink Control System J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Off J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Yellow Draw IOD Pink Valve Stability J14 20 Amp Tr
238. control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions e f the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in preset following distance while matching the speed of light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant the vehicle ahead need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING WARNING Continued Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen sate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehi cle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather condi tions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly bra
239. coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze ne
240. d Rewind Scan and Track Up Down 2 CD Changer in radio Ability to Disk Up Down and program all listed CD controls Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down The VES can even control radio modes or video modes while the radio is turned off The VES can access the radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode Information Mode Display 1 2 3 4 31 L6 Not Available 00010 ss 9 fo 12 Information Mode Video Screen Display Channel 1 Mode Channel 1 Shared Status Channel 1 Audio Only Mute Channel 2 Mode Channel 2 Shared Status Channel 2 Audio Only Mute Channel 1 ENTER Button Action Channel 2 ENTER Button Action Clock 10 Video Lock 11 Not Available Error 12 Disc Changer Status No AN D OI A C N e UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415 Numeric Keypad Menu EH Input File L2 IET amp d WEATHER Preset 10 WEATHER The Weather Channel The Weather Channel Mother Nature S Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pressing the remote control s ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu This 416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency Numeric Keypad Men
241. d Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS eeeeeeeeenn 126 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Inside Day Night Mirror 126 Seat Only a v eis suarum se bad Automatic Dimming Mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 130 If Equipped isses i RR Re 127 Sun Visor Extension If Equipped 131 Outside Mirrors leeren 128 Bl BLIND SPOT MONITORING Outside Mirrors Folding
242. d impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident 304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer controls are located on the mul tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column The rear wiper washer is operated by rotating a switch located at the middle of the lever 036463509 Rear Wiper Washer Control A Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will con tinue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation When this rotary con trol is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
243. d promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hea
244. d the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from any position The shade will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE
245. des the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three mm Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the
246. detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate
247. discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
248. djusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage aS inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints
249. e Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic ram Always fully apply the parking brake when leav brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these and cause damage or injury systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential 508 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE BLD Ready Alert Braking Rain Brake Support and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed trans fer case Hill Descent Control HDC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This s
250. e Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed one 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup sees s eme e Devices Message Pairing Assistance S ectPhone Language Announcement in code pin code Phones Select phone Za Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Select a language Eng ish Espanol or Francais Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero all one call two cancel three confirmation prompt
251. e vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e B
252. e POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 NOTE Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Ifthe condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the st
253. e Information Center EVIC Display Messages esse 493 Op ration vs eate eR cer e ar bd 493 E ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS anaana aaa 495 B OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS is emn 496 Quadra Lift If Equipped 496 When To Use 4WD LOW Range It Equipped cse bm ee 497 Driving Through Water 497 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 499 Hill Climbing 0 6 2 0 00 0 0 0 0006 499 Traction Downhill 0 000 500 After Driving Off Road 500 POWER STEERING 3 46 re ree n 501 JOL Enigirie v screen aed ae Ran s 501 D L NB INE ses acides et Reds eg td 503 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Power Steering Fluid Check 504 Rain Brake Support If Equipped 516 ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive 5 7L ENGINE ONLY lessen 505 Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer E PARKING BRAKE LL 2 eee ee 505 Case Only ccs eee eras 517 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 507 G EO rae M DOUG Brake A AB ce cub git aes 908 Mi TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 520 Traction Control System TCS 508 Tire Markings Blake east BYSTEN DIAS sas cadtnettedhe quot 502 Tire Identification Number TIN 5
254. e RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights turn on the park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps and horn will remain on Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves your thumb and then pull the key out with your other of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage hand the seal during removal 020207436 021334199 Emergency Key R
255. e Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601 Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block WARNING wT the left rear wheel 060505162 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack when the vehicle is being jacked or changing the wheel 7 For vehicle equipped with Quadra Lift refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting And Op mm Se Tonnon the Hazard Vorne flasher erating for further information on disabling auto 3 Set the parking brake matic leveling 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn the ignition OFF 602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jacking Instructions WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher
256. e ae des 130 Variance Compass ss 348 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 9 Vehicle Loading ios eam eee 528 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 10 Vehicle Storage 3 5 ess Eee Cem ete 444 Viscosity Engine Oll 4 seu d 633 Voice Recognition System VR 06 171 Warning Flasher Hazard llle 598 Warning Roll Over 0 0 66 eee 5 Warnings and Cautions 000 9 Warranty Information 200 696 Washers Windshield 0 000000 00 214 Washing Vehicle 2 2 ee 658 Wheel and Wheel Trim 2 iles 660 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 0 660 Wind Buffeting ex vea RR RUE ee RR 46 Window Fogging MISIT PERELSEREQUCILTOITU LITT TITLE 43 POWOE uo bias err seii Bears al UR ER reine OE Rd 43 Windshield Defroster llle 116 Windshield Washers llle 214 Ehud 12er ue reu d otia d 641 Windshield Wiper Blades 00 639 Windshield Wipers llle 214 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 0 639 Wipers Intermittent 0 0 00 eee aee 216 Wipers Rain Sensitive llle 218 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following mus
257. e by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022668725 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al lowed if the child restraint manu facturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckl
258. e control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 WX POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shut ting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or WARNING may not turn on when the ste
259. e designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307 desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interru
260. e ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle service
261. e feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on when tempera tures are below 40 F 4 4 C When temperatures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection
262. e interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 689 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N Cc I S e H E D U L E S 8 Information Provided by DENER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE se o9 8 Sieh a eae ale ak a 693 Impaired TDD TTY 000 695 Prepare For The Appointment 693 Service Contract esses seseris onr t erta 695 Prepare A Dist sse cope a RR S 6903 B WARRANTY INFORMATION 696 Be Reasonable With Requests 693 MB MOPAR PARTS sn 697 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 693 Bi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 697 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 694 In The 50 United States And Washington D C llle 697 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 694 In Mexico contact ossa lef f x 695
263. e operation of your vehicle in other ways ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Periodic Safety Checks You Shoul
264. e phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phoneis e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly Press the button to begin WARNING e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say R Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct To use you Uconnect Phone System in an emer the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number 8ency your mobile phone must be This
265. e positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Floor Mode e x Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode Sp Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode ov Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high unless the blower is controlled manually NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system Also make sure to select only Panel Bi
266. e positive post of the discharged vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the discharged vehicle Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while
267. e shift lever Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Continued Continued 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position With the Keyless Enter N Go feature opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
268. e stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes center position only Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any
269. e system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021440013 Key Fob With Five Button RKE Transmitter THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Unlock Sequence This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Flash Lamps With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Elec
270. e the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating E TTF Tire Pressure 33 m 33 33 amp 33 PSI Omi RUN Tire Pressure Display 041038426 NOTE e
271. e with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE In Floor Mix and Defrost modes air will flow through the outboard panel outlets for occupant comfort If this is not desired the airflow outlet vents can be closed to stop this The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435 Recirculation Control The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode Pressing the Recirculation Control button will control is set to panel or panel floor G3 put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ing the mode control selection ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to iluminate e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or the ignition switch START STOP button is NOTE cycled to OFF the recirculation feature will be can celled Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended
272. eak products seal conditioners compressor The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Oil and refrigerants under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE A C Air Filter 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and AIC Air Filter Replacement lower the door 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward the housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
273. ease to Express Close 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel HEEEEEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
274. eases acanar aa 188 60 40 Split Rear Seat o aiarra eds aali a 193 Reclining Rear Seat o oo llle 195 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 195 Programming The Memory Feature 197 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Parking Lights And Panel Lights 207 Entry Transmitter To Memory 198 Fog Lights If Equipped 208 Memory POSIHGB ReaD isay wq 193 Interior Lights esses 208 Easy Entry Exit eat i pre sna a 200 Lights On Reminder a nr ne A eut Battery Savers cassa POL Pirkiniai B LIGHTS isse wekirksurcesd casa See s 203 Front Map Reading Tah lt lt c 4e004 a0 210 e Ais OES oe eR Rais auo Courtesy Lights esses 269 Atoma Head I ETAPPE s acted me Ambient Light esses 212 Peal ie On e a a syst Multifunction Lever llle 212 aa P Sc IBEQUIDDBOS ee ais Turn Signals sese esee 213 Dayume Runing Tupac DC Equipped dois 206 Lane Change Assist 000 213 io he ds eased 207 Flash To Pass 6 aea a A EN 213 Headlight Delay sss 207 ERE POW Beant s qiu aca te boars ans 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Wa
275. eason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec ond gears direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions To access all six available gears you must use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Elec tronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear 476 STARTING AND OPERATING ME range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmi
276. eat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to an
277. eds to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 OAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Continued WARNING Continued high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your
278. eering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system 504 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others CAUTION Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and Power Steering Fluid Check with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
279. efore moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result e DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other r
280. ehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals CAUTION other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in T Continued close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 WARNING Continued Before using the Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW R
281. ehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 e low road noise smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver
282. ehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights DQ To turn on the parking lights and instrument d panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are
283. elp you in determining when your tires should be replaced e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven e Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced 055007576 tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Informati
284. els 4WD Models Condition OFF the Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable See instructions in Recreational Towing e Transmission in NEUTRAL under Starting and Operating e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e Transmission in PARK e 15 miles 24 km max distance e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is or Dolly Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Tow Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619 If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in What to Do in Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing Wit
285. em This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system The system will have limited operation at that point Immediate Air Suspension Service Repair Required This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system which results in a complete system shutdown The system will be non operational at that point Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height This message is displayed in advance warning to the driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower preset position unless the speed is reduced Selected Ride Height Not Permitted The vehicle speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels Entry Exit Level Off Road Ride Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait This message is displayed if the compressor tempera ture level is too high Level control is suspended until the compressor has cooled down 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open This message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and level control is suspended e Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change e Aerodynamic Ride Height This is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody namic Height EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5
286. em is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Where are you 12 I am on my way 4 I need more direction 13 I ll be late 5 LOL 14 Are you there yet 6 Why 15 Where are we meeting 7 I love you 16 Can this wait 8 Call me 17 Bye for now 9 Call me later 18 When can we meet 10 Thanks 19 Send number to call 11 See You in 15 minutes 20 Start without me ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tre
287. emoval Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information 2 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 021334198 Separating RKE Transmitter 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyles
288. ems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C F R Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change between the different cruise modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET state Pressing of the MODE button in any state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF state 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are tw
289. en to a suitable level ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se lected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 478 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to lim
290. epair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately o ry e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON RUN The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air
291. er outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain 7 access to this power outlet a Front Power Outlet In addition to the front power outlet there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 The rear power outlet is located in the
292. er action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode 514 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped Vehi
293. er outlet off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console 035133386 Front Cupholders There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers located in the fold down center armrest Rear Cupholders a 035133143 m UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 STORAGE To open the glove compartment pull outward on the latch and lower the glove box door Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035209522 Opened Glove Compartment 035209521 Glove Compartment 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iS Door Storage Center Console Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy The center console contains both an upper and a lower access storage
294. eral regulations for Advanced Air Bags ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Comp
295. ering wheel is already warm Do not adjust the steering column while driving Ad The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch justing the steering column while driving or driving bank below the climate controls with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death x1 steering wheel The light on the switch Press the switch to turn on the heated will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator 031705825 EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that in
296. erly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M amp vRbutton and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 t you can press the AVR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the sve button and say Send The system
297. ervice ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673 WARNING 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin 1 Open the hood ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Front Turn Signal 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface contamination will severely shorten bulb li
298. es the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 24 Vehicle Security Light CAUTION This light will flash rapidly for approximately e 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes 25 Temperature Gauge turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 WARNING Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The EVIC consists of the following A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coola
299. es where the VES DVD player may not be able to play some or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as UDF HFS or others are not supported The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video TS portion of the disc If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the VES DVD player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player 422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Compressed Audio Files MP3 and WMA The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Windows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW e
300. etection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check care fully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions and blind spots before backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further informatio
301. ets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature trailer tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the pos
302. ever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF position NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the transmission shifter in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be 462 STARTING AND OPERATING ME turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not engine running for vehicles with 8 speed transmission and the brake pedal must be pressed In 8 speed vehicles the brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Five Speed Automatic Transmission 3 6L Engine If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new veh
303. excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward i
304. f garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of fo
305. f non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me components or negatively impact vehicle perfor chanic P 8 X MP P mance Immediately have potential malfunctions ex
306. f the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the e button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebo
307. fe If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol e Always use the correct bulb size and type for Front Fog Lamps replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the of the front fog lamp housing HOME NRO ONUS 5 Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in engaged in the slots of the collar the housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged 7 Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 073310728 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bu
308. feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 1 3 031309526 Hood Release 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood 031309527 Safety Latch Location close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could
309. feature is supported in the U S Canada and turned on Mexico e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage NOTE Roadside Assistance e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and If you need roadside assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not Press the Se button to begi be applicable with the available mobile service and area i bo eee 2M After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 NOTE e The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Roadside Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the e button and say Setup followed by Roadside Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work prop
310. fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir 3 6L Engine MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Power Steering Reservoir 5 7L Engine MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Information Provided by DENER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 684 Maintenance Chart llle 686 M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your au
311. from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range 512 STARTING AND OPERATING ME High Range Four Wheel Drive Models Or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in WD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if t
312. ft or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 534 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example I
313. full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Kee
314. g press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the e SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the
315. g The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate ra LY 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES B EP My Files DVD Setup pap Screen S Controls If a channel list appears on the right side of Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp s the screen touch the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen System Setup Play Pause Picture VES Stop S view BS LETS DVD Video Menu pe Display Setting Default View 5 Audio Control INSAT View Rear VES Soft Key 3 Touch the 1 soft key and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the screen 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE The 1 and 2 soft keys are displayed for the headphone channels Touch 1 or 2 based on which channel you want to change select the new mode from the available list on the right Modes that are unavailable are greyed out Rear VES Controls Ves HDD DISC AMI DISC MENOS AUX AUX2 12 00 amp Lock Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA Column NOTE To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 e Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is Play Video Games not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped and
316. g a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the shift lever override access cover located on the bot tom of the cupholder Shift Lever Override Access Cover 051210756 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and push and hold the override release lever down 7 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and cupholder liner TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension 618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Wheel Lift Front Towing Wheels 2WD Mod
317. g for all changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Press and hold both the Up and Down buttons simultaneously between 5 and 10 seconds a message will appear in the EVIC stating leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons have been released Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Driving the vehicle over 5 mph 8 km h will return the air suspen sion to normal operation Refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information
318. ge Center Seat LATCH Second Row 60 40 Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position 1 To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and 022633125 ho en ep ee ueniet Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2 Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint strap located on the front of the arm rest 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow t
319. ger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature settings 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439 10 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control OFF If the control is OFF any button will turn the control on 13 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 14 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for both zones from the driver temperature control 15 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings 16 Driver Tem
320. gh power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools 035009523 Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter ror 035005840 The power inverter switch is located on the switch bank below the Climate Con trols To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a sec ond time to turn the pow
321. ghten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration Continued CAUTION Continued in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fl
322. ghting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 034033576 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com f
323. hat was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard against damage e Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 e Install on Rear Tires Only CAUTION Continued Due to limited clearance the Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva lent is recommended on P265 60R18 or 265 50R20 tires WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h
324. he BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for sup ported phones For Uconnect customer support visit www Uconnect Phone com or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone a
325. he Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Sve button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training com mand You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e Press the e button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to e provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium v
326. he Voice Command vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Play to play a Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode Save to save the memo To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Continue to continue recording Hm Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the Delete to delete the recording following commands Play Memos to play previously recorded memos e Next Track to play the next track During the playback you may press the Voice Com mand eVRbutton to stop playing memos You pro ceed by saying one of the following commands List to list a Artist Playlist Album Track etc Repeat to repeat a memo Previous Track to play the previous track Memo Next to play the next memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In Previous to play the previous memo this mode you may say the following commands Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e e e e e In this mode you may say the following commands e Change to system setup Main menu system setup Switch to system setup Change to setup Main menu setup or Switch to setup
327. he drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 24 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 27 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 The Easy Entry Easy Exit
328. he number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook Phonebook Erase All from which you choose To select one of the entries The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you mm from the list press the vn button
329. he seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 022633126 9 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for PH that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a chi
330. he system will automatically update the graphic display of the 552 STARTING AND OPERATING pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR E 77 Tire Pressure aa 33 33 PSI Omi RUN 055838856 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM ee STARTING AND OPERATING 553 message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitti
331. he vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation m gt 7 f 054810680 ESC OFF Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driv
332. here the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number dis plays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit m Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the Compass Variance Map compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 040506040 NOTE For the most accurate compass performance the 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup compass variance must be set before performing the manual Customer Programmable Features menu is reached compass calibration The variance should be set for the zone then press the SELECT but
333. hicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of belts are designed to go around the large bones of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the your body These are the strongest parts of your inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should body and can take the forces of a collision the best be belted at all times Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make Lap Shoulder Belts your injuries in a collision much worse You might ae suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions safe too This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move Two people should never be belted into a single freely with you under normal conditions However in an seat belt People belted together can crash into one collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you another in a collision hurting one another badly striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in the
334. hift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle WARNING Object Detected ParkSense Warning Display 032767408 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
335. hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it ee STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and WARNING exhaust system for damage Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus and cleaned as necessary pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation e e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check for accumulations of plan
336. histicated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines Y that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in for
337. hout The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km Under the following conditions The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h 620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheel
338. i e vehicle speed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met i e engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 e Off Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI Normal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 Park Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Park Mode If Park Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which point ind
339. ia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030409806 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h I Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light
340. ically disengages itself The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing on the left hand side only When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target vehicle the system will provide an additional acceleration based on your current speed The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left turn signal F NE 83 Cc BRAKE D 23456 mi RS Brake Alert 032435496 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system s
341. icated in the Jacking In vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged structions for this vehicle 060637589 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060641339 Jacking Locations WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605 060641341 Front Jacking Location For a rear tire place the jack in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 060637590 mm 606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 060641477 Rear Jacking Location 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607 CAUTION WARNING Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the do
342. icator lamp 3 will go solid If during the height change to Park Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h and the height change continues to Park Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height will return to NRH Park Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 496 STARTING AND OPERATING OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand XA
343. icator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 9 Hill Descent Control Indicator Light If Equipped 4C The symbol indicates the status of the Hill Decent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 Electronic Vehicle Information DisplaylOdometer Display Center EVIC The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows
344. icle are the restraint systems exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and the liftgate closed when you are operating the all passengers vehicle Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front If you are required to drive with the liftgate open passenger make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located Do not use the recirculation mode on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Knee bolsters for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then a
345. icle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the LOCK OFF position before restarting STARTING AND OPERATING 463 Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK OFF position first NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range
346. ideo Screen i System es o Ge du ca ee e us OP dus 402 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 387 Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio 402 Play Mode cc ss hERLDT REGERE REESE Gs 387 Remote Control 23 5904 mE tes List Or Browse Mode 00 388 Remote Control Storage Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 390 Locking The Remote Control 409 E UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO Replacing The Remote Control Batteries 409 TM xr e CE ee B Headphones Operation i422 esee rd 410 UIP PCO ss x ic Ses ac aca duros is e eaa e als od 392 Getting Started iis cesa oL erre EF ed hd 392 AON a eras Baia Nereis Mente Single Video Screen ssec ce eo ac 393 Replacing de ecg phone Peel dades aa 9 T ae Play Video Games 2 0 0 0 00 000 397 Uone Stree Headphone Diete antes Warranty soe dede KEES o eR eed 412 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M System Information ills 413 BM CLIMATE CONTROLS 252a x xn 431 E STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF Dual Zone Manual Heating And Air EQUIPPED kr hr9exwecocrtreh maru 428 Conditioning sesse eR sc 3 yg 432 Radio Operation esses ires ese e a i 429 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature CD Player cesses eee 430 etOL Ue C STCEQUIDBOUS dc sibi dite 496 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 430 Operating TIpS sd db b p REPE ade 443 ll RADIO OPERATIO
347. ilable in the center console base route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch
348. ildren should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for WARNING as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s s
349. illuminate NOTE WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to does not show the degree of brake application an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 507 WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or If th
350. impact CAUTION occurs the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Q sd 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half 3 Head Restraint Back Half Soft Foam and Trim Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 2 Seatback 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 022607492 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 4 J
351. in system in the ROCK mode The HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and HDC will function If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not function To disable HDC press the HDC switch 4WD Low Range Set Speeds e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 25 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th 6th or D Drive 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ES Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ES
352. ings section or the DVD Setup menu When a disc is loaded in the DVD player if equipped and the VES mode is selected and the disc is stopped press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual BACK When navigating in menu mode press to return to the previous screen When navigating a DVDs disc menu the operation depends on the disc s contents 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 17 4 In radio modes press to seek to the previous tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter In satellite video mode press to advance to the previous channel In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 18 ENTER Press to select the highlighted option in a menu 19 A NEXT In radio modes press to select to the next station In disc modes press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter In satellite video mode press to advance to the next channel In menu modes use to navigate in the menu Remote Control Storage The video screen s come with a built in storage compart ment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened To remove the remote use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove To return the remote back into its storage area insert one long edge of the remote into the two
353. io pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all available channels Navigate this list using the remote control s navigation buttons A V to find the desired station press the remote control s ENTER button to tune to that station To jump through the list more quickly navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen 418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Disc Menu EH Disc Menu 2 EV WEATHER S 4 Ln MUTE Preset 10 Start Scan Stop Random WEATHER DIRECT TUNE The Weather Channel F The Weather Channel PM Mother Nature 00 00 Not Available Disc Menu For CDs When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all com mands which control playback of the disc Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play Display Settings Contrast Tint Color Aspect Aute Default Settings Disc Features Video Screen Display Settings When watching a video source DVD Video with the disc in Play mode Aux Video SIRIUS Backseat TV etc pressing the remote control s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419 To change the setting
354. ion 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Tem perature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 521 NOTE e e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design ram standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 522 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards bla
355. ipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 564 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under the headlamp switch 056810677 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler cap STARTING AND OPERATING 565 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper
356. is connected Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook to the Uconnect Phone Transfer From Mobile Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile website for supported phones phone is accessible e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or e Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call phone s SIM card phonebook is downloaded by Saying a Name section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prom
357. isc a Disc Error Other Language Setup message is displayed on the VES and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected A dirty damaged or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2 0 seconds the DVD player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward 1 0 to 3 0 seconds at a time If the end of the disc is reached the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions such as when the vehicle s interior temperature is above 120 F When this occurs the DVD player will display VES High Temp and will shut off the VES displays until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player Menu Language Audio Language Sub Titla Language Japanese Engl ish gt Other Wikka Japanese gt Engl ish a Other KXXX P Japanese 3 Engl ish Other xxxx DVD Player Language Menu 424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME All of the Language settings have a special Other setting to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng lish These languages are selected using a special four digit code To enter a new language code activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions Using the rem
358. ision Warning The Forward Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection scroll up or down until the pre ferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System i
359. istics and climate 700 Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in co
360. it the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gears normally Use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears and ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 and 6 Overdrive gears are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right 4 will change the top available gear The instrument cluster display will show the requested top gear limit however the transmission will not downshift to the requested gear if doing so would overspeed the engine The transmission will downshift once the vehicle speed has slowed sufficiently To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right unti
361. ition has been reached control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious down Pull upward or push downward on the front of injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in seat belt the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Continued 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Passenger s Power Seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the directi
362. itor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning message to appear or the chime to sound l The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instrument cluster for 5 seconds an Inflate to XXX message will be displayed and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value displayed in the Inflate to XXX message The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been recei
363. ke longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX S audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 4 15 self TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF one SET RND 042340030 Uconnect 130 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume
364. ke operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi tions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your ve hicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury e The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 WARNING The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adapti RN E intaini Yow should switeh ott the ACC system daptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet APPO pE tE DEVS heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising in highway construction zones at a constant preset speed For additional information mmm When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode when driving on roads that are winding icy snow in this section covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
365. l D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 WARNING Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fourth and fifth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present the shift lever is in the DRIVE position Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the PE f temperature shift lever to the left The transmission will shift to the ram coolant has reached an adequate range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down the engine temperature e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate vehicle speed is sufficiently high the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator and the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated 480 STARTING AND OPERATING When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating i
366. l be displayed in the EVIC FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Forward Alert Timing OFF Near g h P Example Only 032435760 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Forward Hlert Timing OFF D cn RP u Example Only Forward Alert Timing Near Far FCW OFF Example Only Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you 032435758 NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 WMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives 56789mi 56789mi FCW OFF FCW Off Example 032033147 NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car s
367. l downshift the transmission activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will change the top available gears To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the
368. lb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly 676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 2 o AN Os Oi A Q Raise the liftgate Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate Once lower trim is loose close the liftgate Open the flipper glass Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate Continue removing the trim Disconnect the two trim panel lights 073310731 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 10 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise 11 Remove replace bulb s 12 Reinstall the socket s 13 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim mmm 4 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly 1 Usea screw driver to gently pry against the side of the See your authorized dealer for replacement snap tab to remove the license lamp lens 2 Pull bulb from socket 3 Replace bulb 4 Reinstall lens 073310730 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 6L and 5 7L Engines 25
369. ld restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child re straint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mod
370. le for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water ee MA
371. le in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
372. le water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433 Mode Control Air Direction Push the mode control buttons to choose from several patterns of air distribution Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets 434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost GV Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mod
373. lease the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions m
374. lectronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of NOTE you is no longer probable the warning message will be Jeactitated The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h e When entering or driving in a curve the FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course predic tion This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality WARNING 23456 mi Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect 032433107 every type of collision The driver has the responsi FCW Message bility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warn ing could lead to serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The FCW Status Off Near or Far wil
375. led Occupants especially children should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Continued WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight
376. left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se Program Type 16 Digit Character Display lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Information Inform Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following rz format types
377. link 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or
378. ll off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result Press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph 61 km h When in the OR1 position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 6 in 65 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to ORI Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 0 5 in 13 mm This position provides improved aerody namics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 99 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 m
379. ll throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 579 WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is no
380. lle 116 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission ss 656 OIL Engite osea Sirene tpe ure tite E 631 Power Steering strece hese n RE red 504 Disabled Vehicle Towing lille 617 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 648 Doof Locks 4 seus der RR ged bans 34 Door Locks Automatic leen 36 Door Opener Garage suecs seai llle 270 DAVNE i25 ie ea Er iC RU edi UU Rod acd 495 OffPavement ees 496 OfFRoad vas kr RR RR XY S 496 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 341 E 85Fu lz caer RS Gu RU RR REPE OE Boats 560 706 INDEX eee Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 287 Electric Rear Window Defrost 305 Electric Remote Mirrors lesen 129 Electronic Brake Control System Ls 507 Brake Assist Syste M ser eresrisnriiansse 509 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 509 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 223 Electronic Stability Control ESC 510 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 318 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 613 Hazard Warning Flasher 598 Jump Starting 2 6 kek beeen RR 609 TOW HOOKS 1 cub UR RC Ru ba EP XE 615 Emission Control System Maintenance 628 Engine Air Cleanek Guauecukcepe RET ERR easi d 634 Block Heater i e E em ped 459 Break In Recommendations 113 Compartment
381. lling LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668566 V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward fa
382. lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use sp
383. lubrication or oil change Replace as required 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 9 four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the V ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair saf
384. m tasks that conventional passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to ee INTRODUCTION 5 read these publications
385. mation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator n MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL
386. mbient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the day time the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime
387. mbination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 702 INDEX eee Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 227 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 646 Adding Fuel 2 22 e DR Remb 564 Additives Fuel llle 558 Aibageuc 225 oP et Sade dea gh zs sek edes 72 Airbag Deployment pe adapa a 83 Airbag Light 4 0204 dsGad8ei0 e2SG epe ire 80 Airbag Maintenance 2 6 66000 e eee eae 85 Airbag Side ese ate Ree AA ER hw 75 Airbag Window Side Curtain 76 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 634 Air Conditioner Maintenance 636 Air Conditioning 0 6 0 0 hea a eee eee 432 Air Conditioning Controls 0 432 Air Conditioning Filter llle 638 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 636 Air Conditioning System llle 432 Air Pressure Tires llle 533 Air SUSPENSIONG e i soceri doe anpra dea ead 490 Alarm Pane cedes SA cedi sed oben e a EROR an 27 Alarm Security Alarm 000 21 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 10 Antenna Satellite Radio lessen 381 Antifreeze Engine Coolant creset e 646 Disposal 4 Ee o nee er ARR cae 648 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 508 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 322 Anti Theft System llle 324 Appearance Care sss e Rr na 658 Assistance Towing eue s
388. mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 573 WARNING An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in a collision e Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recre ational Vehicle dealer for additional information 057007122 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 574 STARTING AND OPERATING 057007121 057007120 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment Of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect EE STARTING AND OPERATING 575 Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max Trailer Hitch In the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can dustry Standards tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ch
389. mfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 021809601 Manual Door Lock Knob WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and
390. minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Courtesy Lights side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031464435 031433151 Courtesy Lights Front Map Reading Light Switches 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a Ambient Light Multifunction Lever The overhead console is equipped with an ambientlight The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil steering column ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031563090 022329449 Multifunction Lever Ambient Light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrumen
391. n Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio is also muted e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When t
392. n Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information Display Units Of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Liftgate Chime When this feature is selected the chime will sound when the liftgate is in operation signaling that the liftgate is in operation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information UCONNECT 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED Refer to your Uconnect 730N 430 or 430N user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 UCONNECT 130 042305232 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 360 UN
393. n Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear conti
394. n PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 466 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFT posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could re
395. n TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because top gear is disabled and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not en gaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS shift control when the tra
396. n and necessary to main tain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 2 CC ee 56789 mi EI MEN mi RY 032435549 032435495 Distance Setting 3 Distance Setting 2 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 1 Ce 56789 mi at Distance Setting 1 To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short 032435548 If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automat
397. n if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMMmmm A W Maintenance Chart N T Mileage or time passed o o lololo o o o 2 2 E e e e e e e N whichever comes firs S 8 88 83 8 3 2 2 29 2 2 2 A I3 9 88 J SJS8 9 2 8 8 S8 98 j Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers o o lololo 2 2 2 S 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 2 8 2 2 8 8 S 2 283535353835 3EJ3E SE SERE SEXE af Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X IUE Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and replace if necessary X X X X A 7 5 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your ve 8 hicle for police taxi fleet off X X X X A X road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings parking brake function X X X X X X X Inspect transfer case fluid X X X X EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687 Mileage or time passed whichever comes first 110 000 Or Years Or Kilometers 32 000 20 000 48 000 30 000 64 000 40 000 80 000 50 000 96 000 60 000 112 000 70
398. nabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 021862579 021806189 i Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE For emergency exit from the
399. ncluding vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you t
400. nd the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats V 1022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy down ward
401. ng Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water 498 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To maintain optimal performance of your vehi cle s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
402. ng and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued 502 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory ap
403. ng the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and re
404. ng the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display and an Inflate to XXX kPa message will be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
405. nk Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 523 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 524 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the m
406. nk buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Troubleshooting Tips WARNING If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are come o the most common solutio
407. nnecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 WARNING Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system for further warranty information sealers stop l
408. not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more
409. ns e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener pets or other objects are in the path of the door or to complete the training for a Rolling Code gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured If you have any problems or require assistance please after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 www HomeLink com for information or assistance or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 General Information NOTE This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex two conditio
410. ns pressly approved by the party responsible for compli 1 This device may not cause harmful interference e E ae d qu vice 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun saat onthe overhead console Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen 034134074 gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 Opening Sunroof Express
411. nsmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine 482 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I9 Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information Quadra Trac Il Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode The Quadra Trac II transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI e NEUTRAL e 4W
412. nt You may want to call an authorized dealer ACC If Equipped e Vehicle Speed Fuel Economy for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Trip Info Tire PSI If Equipped ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Vehicle Info EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Messages e UNITS SETTING System Setup e Turn Menu Off 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel A Press and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup Vehicle Speed Trip Info Turn Menu Off and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll V downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button 040909599 Press and release the SELECT button for access to gt main menus sub menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previou
413. ntains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline 558 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Materials Added To Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to or other additives is not needed under normal conditions overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or and they would result in additional cost Therefore you some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Shonda mor ROVOLO saan DURS RU THERE or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser Fuel System Cautions vice Contact your authorized dealer for service CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Con
414. ntil Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Trip Info Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and releas
415. nto the vehicle seat es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
416. ntrol func Remote Control tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause Controls And Indicators FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions VCR 05254 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on pressed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds 4 Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position the remote controls the functionality of screen Channel 1 right side of the screen When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position the remote controls the functionality of screen Channel 2 left side of the Screen 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE 2 Channel Selector Indicators When a button is 5 PP In radio modes press to seek the next tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter In satellite video mode press to advance to the next channel In menu modes use to navigate in the menu V Prev In radio modes press to select to the previous s
417. nuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor 060641336 Jack Storage Location Spare Tir
418. o lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 570 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use
419. o Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decre
420. o ways to change the set speed Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push the ON OFF button You turn off the ignition You engage Four Wheel Drive Low If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning FCW system provides the driver with audible and visual warnings within the EVIC when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react and avoid the potential collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the E
421. obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Window Lockout Button Wind Buffeting The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the disable the window controls on the rear doors press the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain press the Window Lockout button again open o
422. ode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner N 9S 72 Fuel Economy AWG 99 9 OTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 20 mi 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value
423. oes not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Fed
424. of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually tem perature control will continue to operate automatically E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441 Blower Control There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move 04563335 the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counter clockwise The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode 0 Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperatur
425. of the airbag system and you could be injured Turn off temporarily 506 STARTING AND OPERATING ME RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition ed His Two Wheel Drive Models Four Wheel Drive Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED See Instructions e Transmission in PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 587 NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure
426. of the child Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli si
427. ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses other wise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Da Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby MLP Lossless and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All right reserved General Information This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429 Pressing the center b
428. ok entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the e but ton until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the w button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EvRbutton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press
429. om the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go remove the Keyless Enter N Go button and use the key fob to complete this procedure Refer to Installing And Removing The ENGINE START STOP Button Keyless Enter N Go V in Starting and Operating for how to remove the Keyless Enter N Go button Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL STARTING AND OPERATING 591 7 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button located by the selector switch for four seconds je The light behind the N symbol will blink indicating GOW ee SAN shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL mes sage will display on the EVIC
430. omer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 698 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic
431. on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 561 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 5 5 Fuel Requirements 5 If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 Erb Badge fuel or any mixture of these two fuels Ethanol Fuel E 85 o For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom 15 unleaded gasoline mended 562 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and
432. on lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off auto matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on v
433. on of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position EEE E ENI UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup port Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support 030909539 X 8000 Power Lumbar Switch 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward
434. on section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 542 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than w
435. onents Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses e e e e e e Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or arou
436. ons truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC
437. oolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The
438. or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Being too close to the steering
439. or information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink mm button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes 1 Door Opener f rom slow to rapid 2 Training Button P Training The Garage Door Opener 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRA
440. order e System Setup to switch to system setup 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Radio AM Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio Previous Station to select the previous station Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency f to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station e Track to change the track e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Next Track to play the next track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode 2 To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you e Frequency f to change the frequency may say the following commands e Next Station to select the next station e Next Track to play the next track ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Previous Track to play the previous track New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press t
441. osition 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the N
442. ot a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking If Equipped Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support If Equipped Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it
443. ot use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 12 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on zb 0 13 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 System
444. ote control Up and Down cursor but tons highlight the Language item you want to edit and then press the remote control ENTER button Using the remote control Down cursor button select the Other setting then press the remote control s Right cursor button to begin editing the setting Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons select a digit for the current position After selecting the digit press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits When the entire four digit code is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the language code is not valid the numbers all change back to 5x If the digits are visible after this step then the language code is valid Here is an abbreviated list of language codes For more language codes please contact the dealer where the vehicle was purchased Language Code Language Code Dutch 2311 French 1517 German 1304 Italian 1819 Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418 Rating and Password Setup The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches Most DVD Video discs have a rating from 1 to 8 assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audi ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences When a DVD Video disc is loaded its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player
445. p the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs
446. pe mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact
447. perature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings 440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature control buttons Once the de sired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement
448. perly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee However if during a front impact a secondary rear
449. ph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the 492 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Selec Terrain knob is turned to the SPORT posi tion Turning the Selec Terrain knob to the AUTO position will return the system to normal operation Park Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 5 in 38 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Park Mode press the Down button once while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Park Mode change will be cancelled To exit Park Mode press the Up button once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further information The system requires that the engine be runnin
450. placed with This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent possible reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout Continued the life of your vehicle Adding Coolant ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if c
451. power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous veh
452. proved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations STARTING AND OPERATING 583 ar dn E Mee f o O Es O eae O oo oa 7 9 m 057003766 057003765 Four Pin Connector Seven Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes 504 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the ERS shift control while operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also p
453. pted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e e e e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the e button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose t
454. ption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued 308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Continued WARNING e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully Cargo must be securely tied before driving your when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack rack Wind forces due
455. ptional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit functions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels 488 STARTING AND OPERATING With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preced ing this section for shifting this system SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle Selec Terrain Switch control systems along with driver input to provide the Selec Terrain consists of the following positions best performance for all terrains e Sport Dry weather on road calibration Only avail able in 4WD High range Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with im proved handling and acceleration over a two wheel drive vehicle The Electronic Stability Control will set ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintain ing safe handling controls The vehicle will lower if equipped with Air Suspension to Aero Mode in High Range 4WD Low is not a
456. r Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to remove the ACC sensor The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or use an
457. r 8 mm diameter e DVD Video discs MPEG 2 video compression see notes about DVD Region Codes e DVD Audio discs 2 channel audio output only e Audio Compact Discs CDs CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files e Video CDs MPEG 1 video compression DVD Region Codes The VES DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will not play and will be ejected DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the VES DVD player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels which may result in a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode Recorded Discs The VES DVD player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 or WMA files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or re corded are not supported E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421 If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cas
458. r and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 030409528 Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors Out
459. r partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting 021909603 02190960 Window Lockout Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 LIFTGATE WARNING To open the liftgate pull up on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 022290770 Liftgate Release 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate NOTE The liftgate flipper glass will not open if the liftgate is ajar 022209771 Liftgate Glass Release Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate
460. r return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restrictions E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and inclu
461. r s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 You will then be asked to give your mobile phonea e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven with one being want to call the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number connected to your Uconnect System The priority and then dial The number will appear in the display allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile of certain radios phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if
462. r signal to give a command Voice Command Button e VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section
463. r steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment cle
464. r the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to r
465. raw any slack in the belt tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assem blies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 2e Removing Slack From Belt M z AN CA S N Aj ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position th
466. rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the Passive Entry feature for the handle may time out Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s Passive Entry feature If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEF
467. resh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibilit
468. ressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EL GE c Eng E 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 545 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire 546 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as
469. retaining clips first and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position VCR 05255 The Remote Control Storage Locking The Remote Control All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature To disable the Remote Control from making any changes press the Video Lock button on the DVD UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 player if equipped If the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player follow the radio s instructions to turn Video Lock on The radio and the video screen s indicate when Video Lock is active e Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES mm Replacing The Remote Control Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
470. rfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your ately and have it fixed abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tor will withd
471. rity But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone w
472. rk Assist 7 P ae Mo Ped us diano id and fully s to do Control System so may allow water to get Into the tota y integrated Module Infra Red power module and possibly result in a electrical Sensor Compass system failure Kiwanis When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The Mos p buius use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may iui SANDS result in a dangerous electrical system overload If M36 20 Amp Power Outlet a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates Yellow a problem in the circuit that must be corrected M37 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Red Stability Control System Module M38 25 Amp All Door Lock Natural amp Unlock n MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671 VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery Interior Bulbs You may Bulb Number e Remove fuse J13 in the Totally Integrated Power Glove Box Lamp 194 Module TIPM labeled Main Ignition Off Draw IOD Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Overhead Console VT4976 Reading Lamps e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Vi
473. rns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 81869557 Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for convenience reasons with no target vehicle detected Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality 818e955e ee UNDERSTANDI
474. ronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely 2 Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Ajar e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
475. rovide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the transmis sion fluid and filter s as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 585 Cooling System SNOW PLOW To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment heating take the following actions should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans edly or could fail to deploy during a collision mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other City Driving Reduce speed MA aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle Air Conditioning This could adversely affect the functioning
476. s NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at wwwssirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio whi
477. s Single Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System VES e The Remote Control The Touch Screen Radio If Equipped Play A DVD 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen Or Press the LOAD button then corresponding number 1 6 where the DVD is to be loaded Non Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone switch is on Channel 1 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeat edly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER 2 EX 5 Q MUTE 1 Select Mode V Disce FM AUX SAT Wes DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 bd Enter to Select 3 Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen WEATHER Preset 10 WEATHER M The Weather Channel Fa The Weather Channel F Mother Nature 10010 NOTE e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 Usin
478. s four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound Espanol add location Francais 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation The Uconnect Voice Command system allows i VR you to control your AM FM radio disc player USB Mass Storage Class device iPod family of
479. s press the remote control s navi gation buttons A V to select an item then press the remote control s navigation buttons E lt to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control s ENTER button Disc Features control the remote DVD player s if equipped settings of DVD being watched in the remote player Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed e Set the audio to the desired source and channel e Close the video screen To change the current audio mode press the remote control s MODE button This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode Select menu When the screen is reopened the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on press the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Disc Formats The VES DVD player is capable of playing the follow ing types of discs 12 mm o
480. s Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed Liftgate Flipper Glass closed e Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter N Go vehicle Fuel level meets minimum requirement WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Elect
481. s able to transmit two channels of stereo audio simultaneously In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and right side equates to Channel 2 If a video source is selected on Channel 1 then Channel 2 is for audio only Selecting a video source DVD will not show the video on the screen When selecting a video source on Channel 1 the video will display on the screen and the audio could be heard on Channel 1 in the headphones Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the Video Screen is closed 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeat edly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER L2 EX 4 Preset 10 5 EE Select Mode V Disce EM AUX WEATHER SAT Ves DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Brne Weather Channel Fa The Weather Channel Ves AUX2 F Mother Nature Enter to Select ri Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen WEATHER 10010 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
482. s light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN ee Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 TOWIHAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls TOW HAUL 6 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig nals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 7 High Beam Indicator Z Indicates that headlights are on high beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This ind
483. s menu or sub menu BACK Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction odometer line and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom eter line The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories he reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses e Unstored Messages This message t
484. s on the ground CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 mi 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe engine or transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621 If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable vehicles with a two speed transfer case may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed in structions Vehicles equipped with a single speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission damage or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Information Provided by DENER MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
485. s you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use All atten tion should be focused on safely operating the ve hicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if Ro equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone e button and Voice Com mand amp VRbutton that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is you
486. se areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate to Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the A of sliding under the belt in A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous a collision Your body could strike the inside su
487. sed ram Information Provided by DENER WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 598 Bl IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 598 Bl JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 599 Jack Location eis oresar 000 0000 eee eee 600 Spare Tire Stowage 00000005 600 Preparations For Jacking 601 Jacking Instructions soetas ansas mas daad 602 Road Tire Installation o oo anaana 608 B JUMP STARTING sseeeee nnn 609 Preparations For Jump Start 610 Jump Starting Procedure 612 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 613 ll EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 615 E SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 617 Without The Key Fob 0 619 Two Wheel Drive Models 619 O Four Wheel Drive Models 620 598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motio
488. set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience The system can also be controlled manually if desired The AIC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437 CXXXIII 0 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 AIC Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Displa p p pray This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 5 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection 6 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 7 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passen
489. sher Operation Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To Activate To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing E ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To Activate To Set A Desired ACC Speed To Cancel TO Tti Ol amp aoa conecte NC Sai ee ae a To Resume Speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 To Vary The Speed Setting 235 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 261 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 236 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 240 System ies sk i o o eds 262 j Display Warnings And Maintenance 241 isaning The DAUESOH COP GPSI AUG pew m Precautions While Driving With ACC 245 Datkoense System Lange Precautions G Inf 249 ll PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF E eed uisus ma EDUIEEED abstr es
490. shield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 4 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder Wav 072607742 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low
491. sibility of compressor damage when the system is started again UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVG If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and d Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear LIP 40 0 we os COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor _ _ If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level In very cold weather if you X OM need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor z m Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 1382266 Information Provided by DENER STARTING AND OPERAT
492. side mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When the vehicle
493. sor Vanity Lamp V26377 in the fresh air and high blower setting This will Underpanel Courtesy 906 ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Lamps possibility of compressor damage when the system is Instrument Cluster 103 started again General Illumination Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID Bulb Number Rear Turn Stop Tail 3057 Headlamps Low Beam H11 Lamps Headlamps High Beam 9005 NOTE D1S Serviced At Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp 3157K DRL Front Fog Lamps PSX24W Front Side Marker 194 Front Park Turn Lamp 7444NA Aux Aperature Backup 7440 W21W Lamps Auxiliary Liftgate Tail W3W Lamps Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Rear License Lamps W5W Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb your self If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for s
494. sponse System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals Do not drive your vehicle afte
495. ss Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle 3 If any doors are open close them For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery AES becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the
496. ssion shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has ris
497. ssist HSA When this feature is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating infor mation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Lights Only mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time Blind Spot Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Forward Coll
498. st Pull upward on the cover to remove it 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Jump Starting Procedure 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery BEENING 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper Failure to follow this procedure could result in per cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex the discharged battery plosion WARNING CAUTION Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the Failure to follow these procedures could result in discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle personal injury or the discharged vehicle 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper battery cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the remot
499. start the engine Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Insert the ignition key fob and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features
500. structions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur 83 F ACC Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NE 032433103 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the senso
501. sulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 32 km h 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec right side of the steering wheel tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it T
502. sult DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 WARNING Continued practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A
503. sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661 For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a f
504. symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use o
505. t a were daa aet 265 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 249 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 251 Navigation Multimedia Radio 267 ll PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF Turning ParkView On Or Off Without EQUIPPED 4 ez aca ea mma ex ea Aas 256 Navigation Multimedia Radio 267 ParkSense Sensors lle 256 M OVERHEAD CONSOLE 5 268 ParkSense Warning Display 257 Front Map Reading Lights 268 ParkSense Display 0 000 258 Courtesy Lights llle 269 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Sunglasses Bin Door 0006 270 Closing Sunroof Express 281 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 270 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 285 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 272 Pinch Protect Feature lessen 286 Programming A Rolling Code 272 Venting Sunroof Express 282 Programming A Non Rolling Code 274 Sunshade Operation 00 282 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 276 Wind Buffeting icd pU Sadana Es 282 Using Homelink sess 277 Sunroof Maintenance liis 282 DOCULILY e ido orga oe PEAR eh d d PT dde x
506. t be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure alow Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 13WK741 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
507. t cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering col umn The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031563090 Multifunction Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
508. t in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued 500 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Continued e Total weight must be distributed between the tow E vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres ratings are not exceeded sures before trailer usage 1 GVWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the 3 GAWR proper inspection procedure Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures 2 GTW 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor utilized mation in Starting and Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GVWR and GAWR limits spare tire Towing Requirements Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to E STARTING AND OPERATING 581 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braki
509. t the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 526 STARTING AND OPERATING EEEEEEEEEEEEEEMMMMEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures EE STARTING AND OPERATING 527 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure scene z Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 811ad0d0 Tire Placard Location 528 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading
510. tation In disc modes press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter In satellite video mode press to ad vance to the previous channel In menu modes use to navigate in the menu MENU Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc to select a satellite audio or video channel from the Station list or select playback modes SCAN RANDOM for a CD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 8 gt Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play 13 STATUS Press to display the current status 9 Stop Stops disc play 10 11 12 PROG Up Down When listening to a radio mode pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and press ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio When listening to compressed audio on a data disc PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory When listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple disc changer PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previous disc MUTE Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel SLOW Press to slow playback of a DVD disc Press play FP to resume normal play 14 15 16 MODE Press to change the mode of the selected channel See the Mode Selection section of this manual for details on changing modes SETUP When in a video mode press the SETUP button to access the display settings see the display sett
511. tationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the s
512. tatus Menu Button Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Press the MENU button located on the steer ing wheel repeatedly until one of the follow ing displays in the EVIC Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set NE 83 F AMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives Example Only 032433431 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following e e e e Set Speed Change Distance Setting Change System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to ob
513. tch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in STARTING AND OPERATING 577 front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer 578 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at fu
514. tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with R
515. the but ton Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the e button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mo bil
516. the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle if equipped Brake If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped e e e Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle If the ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an
517. the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The avail able choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Pya When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis orr able the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF mes sage for approximately five seconds Refer to 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to
518. the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light _ This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 e Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans E mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also o
519. the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anti
520. ther occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it d
521. thorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685 Required Maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following Change Indicator System pages for required maintenance e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Change oil and filter e Inspect engine cooling system protection and e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu hoses lar wear eve
522. tic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned pro
523. ticular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Re
524. ting And Operating Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added Loose Gascap Indicator p If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se aho ees This light will tum on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e SERV 4WD SERV The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift 4WD 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar a e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar p Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate D flipper glass may be ajar UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
525. tinued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 559 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open 560 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information
526. tion off road surfaces Activate the Hill De scent Control for steep downhill control Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If 490 STARTING AND OPERATING equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain system will return to AUTO Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button T p P amem 4d AUTO SAND SNOW MUD 4WD AN Ue 9 4 2 6 om Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Park Mode Indicator Lamp 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 e e Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 3 in 33 mm This is the primary position for a
527. to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4W
528. tom of the screen Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next mode When the mode is in an audio only source such as FM the Mode Selection menu appears on screen When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi gate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu press the BACK button on the remote control 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particu lar Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wireless head phone Product The warranty is not transferable How Long Does the Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not co
529. ton where the vehicle is driven per the zone map For further information refer to Compass Variance 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in 3 sec onds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
530. tor light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels titter button Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi follow these steps cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian
531. tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Illuminated Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on th
532. ts in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 system will automatically switch to LOW level after ap proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
533. ts or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or POWER STEERING similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake 3 6L Engine rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response e 502 STARTING AND OPERATING and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If th
534. tton To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the SELECT button a check mark appears next to th
535. ture allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the amp e button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz ing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following procedures From outside t
536. ty aecipvceres deme P Eu E 678 Change Interval s asc sd dere e deed 632 Dipstick i22c eciesk ck Rec ete eka aed 631 Disposal 245 weg ed on pee geom Td 634 Filler casei Gaeta eee o RE TU eae 634 Filter Disposal cerpi seoser ss 634 Identification Logo llli 632 Materials Added to illie 633 Recommendation 0 00 00 eee eee 632 Synthetic sr ceco sese ee eee ii 633 MISCOSIEY saaa eed d dopo STR E E ane 633 Oil Filter Selection llle 634 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 627 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 270 Operating Precautions esee 627 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 7 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 00005 128 Verde Usa Sheng no AES ae Od 470 Overdrive OFF Switch 00 0000 470 Overhead Console 0 0 0 00000 eee eens 268 Overheating Engine sis sk e ace a ae es 324 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 7 Paint Care cuim Ea rr t ERR C te god 658 Panic Al rtn cs arrea a exa o e er eva 27 Parking Brake ss 256666 e RR en 505 Park Sense System Rear llle 256 Passing Light eme e eme s 213 PersonalSettings 350 POtS wid sede eR REM PR eee ay GER OA 113 Pets Transporting llle 113 Placard Tire and Loading Information 528 Power Door Locks 714 INDEX EE Inverter udi Seog es exa bueno ce Rd Roe d ase gos 292 LiftGat sesei ke oae Rr RO e Ree RR d 49 MIrYOIS 233g r 520 48
537. u satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit Direct Tune AN AE 2 OET 1 Press the remote control s navigation buttons A V File 999 gt 4 to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted press the remote con d 2 trol s ENTER button to select the digit Repeat these New York State of Mind steps until all digits are entered Glass Houses 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and press the remote control s ENTER button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and press the remote control s ENTER button Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pressing the remote control s ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu This es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417 screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit 1 Press the remote control s navigation buttons A V gt 4 to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted press the remote con trol s ENTER button to select the digit Repeat these steps until all digits are entered 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and press the remote control s ENTER button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and press the remote control s ENTER button Station List Menu When listening to Satellite aud
538. uel Requirements llle 560 Maintenance llle 563 Replacement Parts 563 SATUN Dus Ee d or pire ee Gre eee eie vd 563 Flipper Glass Liftgate llle 48 Flooded Engine Starting llle 457 Bluid Capacities exea Eten er eh oo od 678 Fluid L aks ij ace actin eR aeg RO Gre ces es 118 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 655 Braker eausa aa Aw a Ea e UR Stee d a od 650 Engine Oll e cse ar Hoe s Rondo None god 631 Power Steering eee s Ree en 504 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 679 Fog Lights Re e Res ds 317 Fog Light Service 0000000 674 Folding Rear Seat llle 193 Forward Collision Warning llus 251 Four Way Hazard Flasher 0 598 Four Wheel Drive 000 eee ees 482 Operations Siri sa d arbe e UE Ro oa Rie alk Rae 482 708 INDEX eee SYSTEMS iudi ec a p em eR c d 482 Four Wheel Drive Operation 482 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 2005 613 Front Axle Differential 00 652 Euel 2cuem eR Res gate dE Lir RR 555 PAGING ois sre tator eng are enn ds 564 Additives sisse Re teh 558 CleancANir 2 2cto wkend cubace RE XY aree s 556 CONSERVING Cesset tia xe eos de Yate Ad 341 Ethanol ies eb ex pale bd SY Baha ees 556 Filler Cap Gas Cap 6 2 0 ee srias 564 Gasoline 23 c003 eey doce ya e Gen A 555 Gauge css qud ace ua as cef aere ce Cea 323 Light
539. uid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 CAUTION with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine in transmission shift quality and or torque con verter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special ser Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further fluid speci Si AT fication VICE USO If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
540. ur Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on 536 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have
541. ur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop erly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen Place the transmission into NEUTRAL etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete Aa AUT0 SAND SAND EX g SNOW ROCK Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL STARTING AND OPERATING 487 NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive II System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings include an Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the Quadra Trac II transfer case The o
542. urn signal lamp out Right rear turn signal lamp out Low Tire Pressure ESC System Off Service blind spot system Blind spot detection unavailable Blind spot system off Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Adaptive Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Sensed Vehicle Indicator The system detects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e e Driver Override If you apply
543. using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth Streaming mode e Memo to switch to the memo rec
544. utomatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is located e 3 6L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 460 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement
545. utton counterclockwise and requires no tools for mounting NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse N Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 030434774 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions e full forward e full rearward and e normal Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirro
546. utton is installed and the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go FOBIK is in the passenger compartment ENGINE START STOP LOS 050105203 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Installing And Removing The ENGINE NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only START STOP Button be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF Installing The Button position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch Normal Starting 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition Using The ENGINE START STOP Button switch with the lettering facing up and readable 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure itinto 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the position ENGINE START STOP button once Removing The Button 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will from the ignition switch for key fob use disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency ke der th ed par que cn D darc ie the engine starting press the button again chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 456 S
547. utton will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton 430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the
548. vailable in SPORT mode if 4WD Low is selected the Selec Terrain will auto matically switch back to AUTO Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Normal Ride Height NRH if the transfer case is in high range The level will change to Off Road 1 if the transfer case is in Low range Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH Sand Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud sand or wet grass Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspen sion the level will change to Off Road 1 Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range The vehicle is raised if equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearance Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use on high trac
549. ved The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 549 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message may be displayed for approximately 5 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will sound If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of five seconds an Inflate
550. ver any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a nominal charge UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT ING FROM THE USE OF OR ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413 may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3
551. w Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Continued Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Turning ParkView On Or Off With SALTIONI Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only 4 be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key 2 drive path 3 Press the camera setup soft key m 4 Press the menu hard key e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom the enable rear camera in reverse soft key mended that the driver look frequently over his her 5 shoulder when using ParkView Press the save soft key Turning ParkView On Or Off Without NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance Navigation Multimedia Radio builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 268 UNDERS
552. w the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the num ber of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automati cally after approximately 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switches 030909669 You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator ligh
553. washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complet
554. way control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recom
555. which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available 556 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
556. will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Eve button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect
557. with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the
558. y positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Driver One Memory Position Recall To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 NOTE When recall is requested with the RKE transmit ter and the Easy Entry Exit Seat is turned ON the seat will go to the Easy Entry position When the ignition is placed in the ON RUN position the seat will then automatically return to the set memory position Driver Two Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ses NOTE When recall is requested with the RKE transmit ter and the Easy Entry Exit Seat is turned ON the seat will go to the Easy Entry position When the ignition is placed in the ON RUN position the seat will then automatically return to the set memory position A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on t
559. y of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need
560. y of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety V 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for insta
561. y tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be available The cluster will display the warning ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assembly the bracket back to the beam is 6 6 ft Ibs 9 N m ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service ACC Warning If the system tu
562. you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Wiper Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deac tivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start A
563. you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered WARDING or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A e Drivers must be careful when backing up even lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that when using the Rear Park Assist system Always an obstacle is behind the vehicle check carefully behind your v
564. ype is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored When the appropriate conditions occur this type of mes sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Examples of this message type are Memory System Unavailable Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Vehicle Not in Park Key Left Vehicle Key Not Detected e Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting And Operating Premium TPM System Graphic Display Service Keyless System refer to Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry if equipped Service Park Assist System Park Assist System Blinded e Park Assist Disabled Keyfob Battery Low e e Liftglass Open ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e e e e Left front turn signal lamp out Right front turn signal lamp out Left rear t
565. ystem aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The Continued WARNING Continued ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to

2013 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents